JP6665895B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  A gaming machine such as a pachinko machine is provided with a speaker as a sound generating means capable of generating a sound such as a sound effect (for example, see Patent Document 1). In a gaming machine, sound output from a speaker is emitted toward the front of the gaming machine.

JP 2005-261808 A

  However, there is still room for improvement in the configuration in which the sound output from the speaker is emitted to the front of the gaming machine.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances and the like, and has as its object to provide a configuration suitable for emitting a sound output from a speaker to the front of a gaming machine.

The present invention
A gaming machine body having a gaming board;
A gaming machine front body rotatably provided in front of the gaming machine with respect to the gaming machine body,
A ball tray provided on the front of the gaming machine and capable of storing gaming balls,
A ball passage for discharging game balls to the ball tray,
A speaker having a diaphragm, and outputting a sound in accordance with the vibration of the diaphragm,
Emission means capable of emitting the sound output from the speaker to the front of the gaming machine,
With
On the outer peripheral portion of the ball passage, there is provided a passage portion that allows the sound in the emission means to pass through the ball passage,
The ball passage,
Sound emitted from the passage portion into the ball passage can be emitted toward the ball tray,
The game machine has a front passage portion provided on the front body and communicating with the ball tray,
The gaming machine front body constitutes at least a part of the front passage section and the discharging means,
The passage unit is characterized that you have provided in different locations at the bottom of the ball passage and the outer peripheral portion of the ball passage.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a configuration suitable for emitting the sound output from the speaker to the front of the gaming machine.

It is a perspective view showing the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the main structure of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the main structure of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board unit. It is a longitudinal section showing the passage structure formed inside the dispensing device. It is an exploded perspective view of a front door frame. It is a front view of a front door frame. FIG. 8 is a sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 7 for explaining the configuration of the lower plate unit. FIG. 8 is a sectional view taken along the line BB of FIG. 7 for explaining the configuration of the lower plate unit. It is an explanatory view for explaining a passage configuration of a game ball. It is an explanatory view for explaining a game ball distribution part. It is a perspective view showing the state where the front door side passage unit was separated from the front door frame. It is a perspective view of a front door side passage unit. It is an exploded perspective view of a front door side passage unit. It is a front view of a front door side passage unit. It is a figure which shows the internal structure of a front door side passage unit. It is a top view of a front door side passage unit. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of a shutter mechanism. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram for explaining movement of a shutter mechanism. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the ball clogging suppression structure. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram for explaining movement of a shutter mechanism. It is a figure showing an operation mode of a ball penetration control member. It is a figure showing an operation mode of a ball penetration control member. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of various counters used for a success / failure lottery. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by a main MPU of the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows a special figure special electric power control process. (A) is a schematic diagram showing types of variable display modes, and (b) group is a schematic diagram showing an outline of each variable display mode. It is a flowchart which shows the confirmation process for reservation notice. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of a hold command. It is a flowchart which shows the payout state detection process performed by a payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the payout state receiving process performed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the notification and production control processing performed by the sub-MPU of the notification and production control device. It is a flowchart which shows the processing corresponding to a hold command. It is a figure showing an internal structure of a front door side passage unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is an exploded perspective view of a front door side passage unit in a 3rd embodiment. It is a figure which shows the internal structure of a front door side passage unit. It is an exploded perspective view of a front door side passage unit in a 4th embodiment.

<First embodiment>
Hereinafter, an embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, referred to as a “pachinko machine”) that is a type of gaming machine will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10 as viewed from the front side, and FIGS. 2 and 3 are developed perspective views of the main components of the pachinko machine 10. In FIG. 2, the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the game area PE is omitted for convenience.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a game machine main part 12 attached to the outer frame 11.

  The outer frame 11 is formed by connecting a wooden plate to four sides, and has a rectangular frame shape. By attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island facility, the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall. In the pachinko machine 10, the outer frame 11 is not an indispensable configuration, but may be a configuration in which the outer frame 11 is provided on an island facility in a game arcade.

  The gaming machine main part 12 is supported by the outer frame 11 in a state capable of opening and closing. More specifically, an upper support bracket 17 is fixed to a connection portion between the upper frame portion and the left frame portion in the outer frame 11, and a lower portion is further connected to a connection portion between the lower frame portion and the left frame portion in the outer frame 11. A side support bracket 18 is provided. The upper support bracket 17 and the lower support bracket 18 constitute a support mechanism. The main mechanism 12 rotates the left side of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the outer frame 11 from the front of the pachinko machine 10 by the support mechanism. The right side of the pachinko machine 10 is rotatable with the right end as the rotation tip side (see FIGS. 2 and 3).

  As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming machine main section 12 includes an inner frame 13 as a gaming machine body, a front door frame 14 as a gaming machine front body disposed in front of the inner frame 13, and an inner frame 13. And a back pack unit 15 disposed rearward. The inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main unit 12 is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11. More specifically, the inner frame 13 is rotatable forward with the left side being a rotation base end side and the right side being a rotation end side in a front view.

  A front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13. The front door frame 14 is rotatable forward with the left side being a rotation base end side and the right side being a rotation tip side in a front view. Further, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and is rotatable rearward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in front view ( (See FIG. 3).

<Front door frame 14>
Next, the front door frame 14 will be described. As shown in FIG. 2, the front door frame 14 mainly includes a synthetic resin frame 20 whose outer shape is almost the same as the outer frame 11, and covers almost the entire front surface of the inner frame 13. I have. A substantially elliptical window 21 is formed at the center of the frame 20 so that substantially the entire area of a game area PE described later can be visually recognized from the front. The window 21 is formed by a window panel 22. The front door frame 14 is closed from the rear side.

  The window panel section 22 includes a plurality of glass panels 23 having transparency, and a glass holder that holds the glass panels 23. The glass holder is formed with a partition for partitioning the holding area of the glass panel 23 back and forth, and the two glass panels 23 face each other across the partition. That is, by securing a predetermined gap between the two glass panels 23, the game area PE is doubly covered by the glass panels 23 from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 while avoiding interference between the glass panels 23. It is in a state.

  It is not always necessary to unitize both glass panels 23 using a glass holder, and each glass panel 23 may be individually attached to the frame 20. Furthermore, the number of glass panels is arbitrary, and may be one or three or more. However, from the viewpoint of improving safety and security, it is preferable to employ a plurality of glass panels, and to face each of the glass panels back and forth with a predetermined gap therebetween. Incidentally, it is also possible to adopt a transparent synthetic resin panel member instead of the glass panel.

  As shown in FIG. 1, light-emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the window panel 22 (specifically, the window 21). For example, along the periphery of the window 21, there is provided an annular lamp section 26 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED. The annular lamp section 26 is turned on or blinked in accordance with a change in the game state at the time of a big hit, a predetermined reach, or the like. An error display lamp 27 is provided at the center of the annular lamp 26 and at the top of the pachinko machine 10 to be lit when a predetermined error occurs. A ramp section 28 is provided.

  The pachinko machine 10 has an upper speaker unit 29 provided at an upper part thereof and a lower speaker unit 30 provided at a lower part thereof. The speaker units 29 and 30 can output sounds (audible sounds including voice messages) such as effect sounds, sound effects, and notification sounds. The effect sound is a sound that can enhance the effect of the effect during the game. Examples of the effect sound include a melody corresponding to the effect and an effect sound corresponding to the game state. Examples of the notification sound include a guide sound for notifying the player of the state of the pachinko machine 10 and a fraudulent sound for notifying the hall manager of fraud.

  The upper speaker unit 29 is provided at a position near the left and right prize ball lamp units 28 in the upper part of the front door frame 14. Each of the upper speaker units 29 is disposed at a position above each of the corners above the front door frame 14 above the award ball lamp unit 28.

  Below the window 21 in the front door frame 14 (frame body 20), an upper bulging portion 31 and a lower bulging portion 32 bulging toward the near side are vertically arranged side by side. An upper plate 33 that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 31, and a lower plate 34 that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 32. The upper plate 33 has a function of temporarily storing game balls as game media paid out from a payout device described later, and guiding the game balls to a game ball launching mechanism described later while aligning them in a line. The lower plate 34 has a function of storing surplus game balls in the upper plate 33. The lower plate 34 corresponds to a ball tray.

  The upper plate 33 has a ball entrance 33a on the back wall thereof, temporarily stores game balls paid out from a dispensing device described later and introduced through the ball entrance 33a, and aligns the game balls in a line. It has the function of guiding to the ball outlet 33b (see FIG. 7). The game ball that has come out of the upper plate 33 from the ball exit 33b is guided to a game ball firing mechanism described later.

  The lower plate 34 has ball inlets 34a and 34b (see FIG. 7) provided on the inner wall. The first ball entrance 34a among the ball entrances 34a and 34b is capable of introducing surplus game balls in the upper plate 33 to the lower plate 34, and the second ball entrance 34b is connected to the upper plate The game balls stored in 33 can be introduced into the lower plate 34. A ball hole 35 is formed at the bottom of the lower plate 34. The ball hole 35 is opened by operating a ball lever 36 provided on the front side of the lower bulging portion 32. Then, the stored game balls are discharged below the lower plate 34. The ball removing hole 35 is closed by a closing plate 37 so as to be openable and closable, and the closing plate 37 shifts to an open state as the ball removing lever 36 is operated.

  A game ball firing handle 41 is provided on the right side of the lower bulging portion 32 so as to protrude toward the near side. By operating the game ball firing handle 41, a game ball is fired from a game ball firing mechanism described later. The game ball launch handle 41 is disposed on the opposite side of the lower speaker section 30 across the lower plate 34 in the width direction of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 2, a front door side passage unit 45 is attached to the rear surface of the front door frame 14. The front door side passage unit 45 is formed of synthetic resin, and has a front door side upper plate passage 272 communicating with the upper plate 33 and a front door side lower plate passage 273 communicating with the lower plate 34 ( See FIG. 15). In the front door side passage unit 45, a receiving portion projecting rearward and opening upward is formed at an upper corner thereof, and the receiving portion is divided into right and left by a partition wall, so that a front plate side upper plate passage is formed. An entrance portion of the portion 272 and an entrance portion of the front door side lower plate passage portion 273 are defined. The game balls entering the front door side upper plate passage 272 are guided to the upper plate 33, and the game balls entering the front door side lower plate passage 273 are guided to the lower plate 34.

  On the rotation base end side on the back surface of the front door frame 14, a projection shaft is provided at an upper end and a lower end thereof. These projection shafts constitute an assembly mechanism for the inner frame 13. A plurality of hooks 49 extending rearward are vertically arranged on the rear end side of the front of the front door frame 14. These hooks 49 constitute a locking mechanism for the inner frame 13.

<Inner frame 13>
Next, the inner frame 13 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of an inner frame base 50 whose outer shape is substantially rectangular like the outer frame 11. The height of the inner frame base 50 is set slightly smaller than the height of the outer frame 11. Further, the inner frame base 50 is arranged close to the upper frame portion of the outer frame 11, and a slight gap is formed between the lower frame portion of the outer frame 11 and the inner frame base 50. A curtain plate is mounted on the outer frame 11 so as to close this gap. The curtain plate is disposed below the inner frame base 50 (specifically, the lower end portion). When the inner frame 13 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, the inner frame base 50 is placed on the curtain plate. Becomes

  Supporting brackets 51 and 52 are attached to the upper and lower ends of the rotation base end side of the front surface of the inner frame base 50. Shaft holes are formed in the support fittings 51 and 52, and the front door frame 14 is rotatably supported with respect to the inner frame 13 by inserting the projection shaft of the front door frame 14 into the shaft holes. ing.

  Insertion holes for inserting hooks 49 provided on the back surface of the front door frame 14 are provided on the rotation front end side of the front surface of the inner frame base 50, respectively. The pachinko machine 10 has a configuration in which a locking device 55 for locking the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 is hidden behind the inner frame 13. Therefore, the front door frame 14 is locked to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened by locking the hook metal 49 to the locking device 55 (specifically, the front door hook receiving member) through the insertion hole. Further, the locking device 55 has an inner frame hook member 57 extending rearward of the inner frame 13. When the hook members 57 for the inner frame are hooked on the hook receiving members 19 of the outer frame 11, the gaming machine main unit 12 is locked in a state where the outer frame 11 is closed.

  At the lower right corner of the inner frame base 50, a cylinder lock 58 for unlocking the locking device 55 is installed. The cylinder lock 58 is integrated with the locking device 55. When the key inserted into the key hole of the cylinder lock 58 is turned clockwise, the lock of the front door frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 13 is released, and the cylinder lock 58 is inserted into the key hole of the cylinder lock 58. The locking device 55 is configured so that when the key is turned to the left, the locking of the inner frame 13 with respect to the outer frame 11 is released.

  At the center portion of the inner frame base 50, a game board housing portion 53 for housing the game board unit 60 is formed. The game board accommodating portion 53 is a concave portion which is recessed rearward of the game machine in accordance with the outer shape of the game board unit 60, and the game board unit 60 is manually locked while being fitted into the game board accommodating portion 53 from the front of the game machine. Fixed by mechanism. A substantially rectangular window hole 54 is formed at the bottom of the game board accommodating portion 53, and a rear configuration (a back block 60 b described later) of the game board unit 60 protrudes rearward of the inner frame 13 through the window hole 54. ing. The window 54 is almost entirely covered by the game board unit 60 mounted on the inner frame base 50 from the front of the game machine.

<Game board unit 60>
The game board unit 60 includes a game board 60a formed mainly of a plate made of a transparent synthetic resin material, and a game board 60a provided on the back side of the game board 60a, and various game components (variable display device, control device, movable type) to be described later. Of the rear block 60b mounted on the block base 136, and the front part of the rear block 60b is visible through the game board 60a.

  On the front surface of the game board 60a, the above-mentioned game area PE in which the game balls flow is formed. As already described, the game area PE is covered by the window panel portion 22 (specifically, the rear glass panel 23). The window panel portion 22 is formed such that a gap between the rear glass panel 23 and the front surface of the game board 60a is slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball, that is, a game ball flowing down the game region PE is formed in the game region PE. They are arranged so that they do not line up at the same location. Thereby, ball clogging in the game area PE is suppressed. In addition, the game board 60a (specifically, a plate body) is not limited to being made of synthetic resin, but may be made of wood.

  Hereinafter, the game board unit 60 (particularly, various configurations arranged in the game area PE of the game board 60a) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a front view of the game board unit 60.

  As shown in FIG. 4, a plurality of large and small openings are formed in the game board 60a so as to penetrate in its own thickness direction (front-back direction). In each opening, a general winning opening 61, a variable winning device 64, operating openings 62 and 63, a through gate 65, and the like are provided, respectively. When a game ball enters the general winning opening 61, the variable winning device 64, and the operating ports 62, 63, the game ball is detected by a detection sensor (not shown) provided corresponding to each ball entry portion, and the detection result is obtained. A bonus such as a predetermined number of prize balls (payout of game balls) is given to the player based on the. In addition, an out port 68 is provided at the lowermost portion of the game board 60a, and game balls that have not entered various ball entry sections or the like are discharged from the game area PE through the out port 68. In the following description, in order to clearly distinguish a game ball from entering the out port 68, a game ball entering the general winning port 61, the variable winning device 64, and the operating ports 62 and 63 is also referred to as "winning". Express.

  In addition, a large number of nails are planted on the game board 60a in order to appropriately distribute and adjust the flow path of the game balls, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are provided. The flow path of the game ball is differentiated by the various configurations such as the nail and the windmill, and it is adjusted so that the prize to the above-described general prize port 61 or the like is generated with an appropriate probability.

  A center opening 72 is formed in the center of the game board 60a, and a transparent opening cover (not shown) is attached so as to cover the center opening 72 from the back side of the game board 60a. Behind the central opening 72, the variable display unit 67 and the like belonging to the rear block 60b are located, and the variable display unit 67 and the like can be visually recognized from the front of the gaming machine through the central opening 72 (opening cover). .

  Incidentally, the game board 60a has an opaque sheet material laminated on the transparent plate material. This sheet material is stuck on the plate surface on the front side of the transparent plate material, and blocks the line of sight to the back side of the game board 60a. For this reason, the range visible from the front of the gaming machine in the back block 60b is limited to a portion exposed to the front of the gaming machine through the central opening 72 of the gaming board 60a.

  In the gaming board 60a, operating ports 62 and 63, a through gate 65, and the like are provided around the central opening 72. The operating ports 62, 63 are constituted by an upper operating port 62 disposed below the variable display unit 67 and a lower operating port 63 disposed immediately below the upper operating port 62, and in particular, the lower operating port 63. The (lottery opportunity entry ball unit) 63 is provided with an electric accessory 71 as an open / close type entry assist device (entrance assist device) or an opening / closing member (open / close device). The electric accessory 71 has a pair of left and right movable pieces and a solenoid-type driving unit that drives the movable pieces, and is in an open state (assisting state) in which it is possible or easy to enter the lower working port 63. And a closed state (non-auxiliary state) where entry is impossible or difficult.

  The through gate 65 is disposed upstream of the lower operating port 63 (specifically, on the side of the variable display unit 67), and is won by a lottery triggered by passing of the game ball through the through gate 65. In this case, the electric accessory 71 is switched from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined time.

  When a ball enters the upper working port 62, payout of three game balls is executed. When a ball enters the lower working port 63, payout of four game balls is executed. However, the number of game balls to be paid out is not limited to the above. However, in order to increase the advantage of the lower working port 63 with respect to the upper working port 62, it is preferable to set the payout number of the lower working port 63 larger than the payout number of the upper working port 62.

  The variable winning device (special ball-entering device or special ball-entering device) 64 is formed with a special winning opening communicating with the back side of the game board 60a, and an opening / closing member (opening / closing means) for opening and closing the special winning opening. Door is provided. The opening and closing door is switchable between an open state (assisting state) in which game balls can be or easily entered, and a closed state (non-assisted state) in which entering of the game balls is impossible or difficult. Further, the opening and closing door is connected to a variable winning drive unit (more specifically, a solenoid) provided on the back side of the game board 60a, so that the opening and closing door is normally kept in a closed state, and is opened and closed in an internal lottery. When a transition to the execution mode (opening / closing execution state) is won (the jackpot: when a transition to a special game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state is won), the state can be switched to the open state. I have.

  Here, the open / close execution mode is a mode to which a shift is made when a big hit is won. As an opening mode of the variable winning device 64 in the opening / closing execution mode, for example, a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winnings is one round, and a plurality of rounds (for example, 16 rounds) are set as an upper limit. The opening of the door is set to be repeated.

  Here, the variable display unit 67 will be supplementarily described. The variable display unit 67 has a symbol display device 75 for variably displaying (variable display) symbols in response to winning of the operating ports 62 and 63 as a trigger. The symbol display device 75 is configured as a liquid crystal display device having a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 170 described later. On the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75, for example, symbols are displayed side by side on the top, middle, and bottom, and these symbols are scrolled in the left-right direction and displayed in a variably manner. Then, when the jackpot is won, a predetermined combination of symbols is stopped and displayed on the preset pay line, and the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode (special game state or jackpot). The symbol display device 75 is not necessarily a liquid crystal display device, but may be a dot matrix or 7-segment type display device.

  The game board 60a is provided with a center frame 77 so as to surround the center opening 72. The center frame 77 is fixed to the game board 60a (specifically, a plate) from the front side thereof. In such a fixed state, the center frame 77 stands up from the front face of the game board 60a, so that the center frame is concerned. The gap between the window panel portion 77 and the window panel portion 22 is configured to be smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, the game ball flowing down the game area PE is prevented from colliding with the symbol display device 75, and the flow path of the game ball flowing down the game area PE is set to the right on the variable display unit 67 (specifically, the center frame 77). The route is roughly divided into a route detouring from the left and a route detouring from the left.

  A stage on which the game ball can roll left and right is formed on the upper surface of the frame constituting the lower part of the center frame 77. The game balls flowing from the inflow ports formed in the left and right left frame portions of the center frame 77 are discharged onto the stage section through the warp passages formed in the center frame 77 as well. The stage section is configured such that the game ball that has reached the stage section relatively easily flows into the upper operating port 62, and the player's attention to the movement of the game ball on this stage section is improved. Has contributed to.

  Here, in the present embodiment, as described above, the central opening 72 is covered by the transparent opening cover, so that the game ball that has reached the stage portion does not move to the back block 60b (variable display unit 67) side. Regulated.

  The operating ports 62 and 63 are arranged at positions near the central opening 72 (variable display unit 67). Since the player can shift to the special game state with the winning of the operating ports 62 and 63 as a trigger, the player pays attention to whether or not to win the operating ports 62 and 63 and grasps whether or not to shift to the special game state. Therefore, it is considered that attention is paid to the symbol display device 75. Providing the operation ports 62 and 63 near the variable display unit 67 is a device for concentrating a portion that the player wants to pay attention to around the variable display unit 67.

  At the right end of the game board 60a (rotating tip of the game board unit 60 described later), a game area partition member 99 for forming a game area PE together with a guide rail 100 described later is provided. The game area partition member 99 is provided with a stopper member against which a game ball flying along the main display unit 81 or the guide rail 100 collides. The stopper member is a buffer member arranged near the tip of the guide rail 100, and the game ball that collides with the stopper member flows down the game area PE after its momentum is weakened. That is, the stopper member is provided with a deceleration function for weakening the momentum of the hitting game ball.

  Here, the main display unit 81 will be supplementarily described. The main display unit 81 is embedded in the game area partition member 99, and is arranged so that a part thereof faces the window panel section 22. A main display portion on which a predetermined pattern or the like is displayed is provided in the facing portion. The main display unit 81 is electrically connected to a main control device described later, and the display content of the main display unit is controlled by the main control device.

  The main display unit includes a lower operating port display unit that displays a lottery result based on winning in the upper operating port 62 and a right operating port that displays a lottery result performed based on a winning in the lower operating port 63. And a display unit. In the display for the lower operating port, the display of the variation of the pattern is performed with the winning of the upper operating port 62 as a trigger. The result is specified. When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning in the upper operating port 62 is a winning result corresponding to the shift to the opening / closing execution mode, the variable display is stopped on the lower operating port display section, and a predetermined stop result is obtained. After the pattern is displayed, the mode is shifted to the open / close execution mode.

  In the lower operating port display section, a pattern change display is performed with a winning in the lower operating port 63 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variable display, an internal lottery performed based on the winning in the lower operating port 63 is performed. The result is specified. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning in the lower operating port 63 is a winning result corresponding to the jackpot, the variable display is stopped on the display for the right operating port, and a predetermined pattern is displayed as a stop result. After that, the mode is shifted to the open / close execution mode according to the result.

  Here, based on the winning of one of the operating ports 62 and 63, the variable display is started on the corresponding operating port display unit, a predetermined stop result is displayed, and the game is continued until the variable display is stopped. This corresponds to one time. However, one game time is not limited to the above-described contents. For example, a single display area is provided, and no matter which operating port 62 or 63 wins, a single display area is provided. In the configuration in which the variable display is performed in the display area, the variable display is started in the single display area, and the variable display is stopped once in a state where a predetermined stop result is displayed. It is also possible to use

  In addition to the above-mentioned two display portions, the main display portion of the main display unit 81 is provided with a through gate display portion for displaying a lottery result based on winning in the through gate 65. In the through gate display section, the pattern change display is performed with the winning in the through gate 65 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variable display, the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning in the through gate 65 is clearly indicated. Is done. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning in the through gate 65 is a winning result corresponding to the shift to the electric open state, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the display unit for the through gate, and the fluctuation display is displayed. After being stopped, the state shifts to the electric utility open state. In the electric-combination open state, the electric combination 71 provided in the lower working port 63 is opened in a predetermined manner.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the number of times the game ball has passed through the through gate 65 is held up to a maximum of four times, but the number of the held balls is displayed on the main display portion of the main display unit 81. A display unit for the number of reservations is provided.

  The main display unit described in detail above can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel unit 22 of the front door frame 14, and a game ball is prevented from moving in front of these various display units. Therefore, its visibility is ensured.

  The structure of the inner frame 13 will be described again with reference to FIG. 2. In the inner frame base 50, the game is directed toward the game area PE based on the operation of the game ball firing handle 41 below the mounting area of the game board 60a. A game ball launching mechanism 110 for launching a ball is provided. The game ball launching mechanism 110 includes a solenoid 111 that launches a game ball disposed at a predetermined launch standby position, a launch rail 112 that defines a launch direction of the game ball launched by the solenoid 111, and a game at the launch standby position. A ball feeding device 113 for supplying a ball and a base plate 114 on which various components 111 to 113 are mounted are provided as main components, and the base plate 114 is fixed to the inner frame base 50 so that the inner frame base 50 is fixed. 50 are integrated.

  The firing rail 112 is fixed to the base plate 114 in an obliquely inclined state so as to be inclined upward toward the game board 60a. At a position near the downstream end (that is, the lower end) of the firing rail 112, a ball stopper for keeping the game ball supplied from the ball feeding device 113 at the above-described firing standby position is provided. The solenoid 111 is disposed at a position further downstream than the ball stopper.

  The solenoid 111 is electrically connected to a power supply / emission control device described later. When the output shaft of the solenoid 111 reciprocates in the expansion and contraction direction based on the output of the electric signal from the power supply / emission control device, the game ball placed at the emission standby position is placed on the game board 60a side, It is struck toward the guide rail 100 mounted on the board 60a.

  The guide rail 100 defines the game area PE so that the outer shape of the game area PE is substantially circular. In addition, the guide rail 100 includes an inner rail 101 and an outer rail 102 which are arranged to face each other with a gap slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball, and a single guide path 103 is defined by the two rails 101 and 102. Is formed. The guide passage 103 has an entrance portion opened on the tip side (obliquely downward) of the firing rail 112 and an exit portion located above the game area PE. The game ball fired based on the operation of the solenoid 111 is guided to the game area PE by moving in the order of the firing rail 112 → the guide rail 100 (entrance portion → exit portion). By adjusting the operation amount of the game ball firing handle 41, it is possible to separate the game balls into an area on the left side of the variable display unit 67 in the game area PE and an area on the right side of the variable display unit 67 in the game area PE. It is possible.

  In addition, on the front side of the exit portion of the game board 60a, more specifically, near the tip of the inner rail 101, a reversion preventing member 106 for preventing reversion of the game ball that has reached the game area PE into the guiding path 103 is attached. This prevents the game ball that has reached the game area PE from hindering the launch of the subsequent game ball.

  The guide rail 100 (see FIG. 4) and the launch rail 112 are arranged so that the entrance portion of the guide rail 100 and the tip end of the launch rail 112 face diagonally across the lower edge of the game board 60a. In other words, the two rails 100 and 112 are arranged such that the entrance of the guide rail 100 and the tip of the firing rail 112 are shifted left and right near the lower end edge of the game board 60a. As a result, a predetermined gap is formed between the entrance portion of the guide rail 100 and the firing rail 112 while bringing the two rails 100 and 112 closer to the lower edge of the game board 60a.

  A foul ball passage 118 is provided below the gap formed in this manner. The foul ball passage 118 is formed integrally with the front door side passage unit 45 of the front door frame 14. If the game balls fired from the game ball firing mechanism 110 do not reach the game area PE and return in the guide passage 103 as foul balls, the foul balls enter the foul ball passage 118 through the gap. Becomes The foul ball passage 118 communicates with the front door side lower plate passage portion 273, and the game balls that have entered the foul ball passage 118 are discharged from the second ball inlet 34b to the lower plate 34. As a result, interference between the foul ball and the game ball to be fired next is suppressed.

  In the inner frame base 50, a through-hole is formed on the left side of the firing rail 112 (specifically, on the side supporting the front door frame 14) so as to pass through the inner frame base 50 in the front-rear direction. A frame-side passage unit 121 is provided. The inner frame side passage unit 121 is screwed to the inner frame base 50.

  Next, the rear configuration of the inner frame 13 (the inner frame base 50 and the game board unit 60) will be described with reference to FIG.

  On the rotation base end side on the back surface of the inner frame base 50, bearings 132 are vertically arranged. Bearing parts are formed on the bearing bracket 132 so as to be vertically separated from each other, and the back pack unit 15 is rotatably attached to the inner frame 13 by these bearing parts. Further, a plurality of fixing levers for fixing the back pack unit 15 to the inner frame base 50 in a closed state are provided on the back surface of the inner frame base 50.

  As described above, a window hole 54 that penetrates in the thickness direction of the inner frame base 50 and is open to the rear side of the inner frame base 50 is formed in the bottom portion of the game board accommodating portion 53 in the inner frame base 50. The window 54 is covered from the front side of the inner frame 13 by the game board unit 60 housed in the game board housing part 53. Various components such as a control device are mounted on the rear surface of the game board unit 60 (the rear block 60b), and these various components are exposed to the back side of the inner frame 13 through the window 54. Here, the configuration of the back surface of the game board unit 60 will be described.

  The back block 60b attached to the back of the game board 60a has a substantially box-shaped block base 136 opened to the game board 60a side, and the block base 136 is fixed to the back of the game board 60a. Thereby, the game board 60a and the back block 60b are integrated.

  More specifically, a part of the block base 136 protrudes to the rear side of the inner frame base 50, and the above-described symbol display device 75 and the symbol display device 75 for driving the symbol display device 75 to the protruding portion. The display control device 170 is attached. The symbol display device 75 and the display control device 170 are arranged so as to overlap in the front-rear direction (the thickness direction of the inner frame base 50) such that the symbol display device is on the front side and the display control device 170 is on the rear side. Further, on the back of the block base 136, a notification / effect control device 143 is mounted so as to be located behind the display control device 170.

  The notification / production control device 143 includes a notification / production control substrate that controls sound output and lamp display in accordance with an instruction from a main control device described later, and controls the display control device 170. It is housed in a substrate box 145 made of a transparent resin material or the like.

  A main controller unit 160 is provided below the notification / effect controller 143 so as to cover the block base 136 from behind. The main controller unit 160 includes a mounting base 161 made of synthetic resin fixed to the back of the game board unit 60 (specifically, the rear block 60b), and a main controller 162 mounted on the mounting base 161. I have. The main control device 162 includes a main control board having a function of controlling the main control of the game (main control circuit) and a function of monitoring the power supply (power failure monitoring circuit), and the main control board is made of a transparent resin material. It is housed in a substrate box 163 made of the same.

  The board box 163 includes a substantially rectangular parallelepiped box base (front case body) and a box cover (back case body) that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are non-openably connected by a sealing portion as sealing means, whereby the substrate box 163 is sealed. A plurality of sealing portions are provided on the long side of the substrate box 163, and at least one of them is used to perform a sealing process.

  Any configuration can be applied to the sealing portion as long as the box base and the box cover are joined so that the box base and the box cover cannot be unsealed. It is designed to be unopened. The sealing process by the sealing section prevents unauthorized opening after the sealing, and even if an unauthorized opening is performed, such a situation can be detected quickly and easily. It is possible to perform the sealing process again even afterwards. That is, the sealing process is performed by inserting the locking claw into at least one of the plurality of sealing portions. When the board box 163 is opened, for example, when a failure occurs in the accommodated main control board or when the main control board is inspected, the connecting part between the sealing part in which the locking claw is inserted and another sealing part is connected. Disconnect. Thereby, the box base and the box cover of the board box 163 are separated, and the main control board inside can be taken out. Thereafter, when the sealing process is performed again, the locking claws are inserted into the long holes of the other sealing portions. If a history indicating that the board box 163 has been opened is left in the board box 163, it can be easily found by looking at the board box 163 that unauthorized opening has been performed.

  A plurality of connecting pieces are provided on one short side of the substrate box 163 so as to protrude to the side. These connecting pieces correspond one-to-one with a plurality of connected pieces formed on the mounting base 161, and a sealing process is performed between the substrate box 163 and the mounting base 161 by the connecting pieces and the connected pieces. Will be

  A portion of the front surface of the block base 136 facing the lower rear surface of the game board 60a corresponds to the game board openings of the general winning opening 61, the variable winning device 64, and the operating ports 62 and 63, and is located on the downstream side. A collection passage (not shown) that gathers in one place is formed. As a result, all the game balls that have won the general winning opening 61 and the like are arranged below the game board unit 60 via the collection passage. That is, the block base 136 is provided with a function of collecting game balls that have won various winning ports.

  A discharge passage, which will be described later, is arranged below the game board unit 60, and the game balls gathered below the game board unit 60 by the collection passage are led out into the discharge passage. Note that the out port 68 also communicates with the discharge passage in the same manner, and game balls that have not won any of the winning ports are led out through the out port 68 into the discharge passage.

  In addition, the block base 136 constituting the rear block 60b includes a general winning opening detection sensor for detecting a game ball that has won the general winning opening 61 as a detection sensor for each of the above-mentioned winning portions, and a variable winning device. A detection sensor for a variable prize device that detects a game ball that has won a prize 64, and a detection sensor for an operation port that detects a game ball that has entered the operation ports 62 and 63 are mounted. Is configured. These various detection sensors are electrically connected to the main control device 162, and the detection information (detection signal) is output from each detection sensor to the main control device 162.

<Back pack unit 15>
Next, the back pack unit 15 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  The inner frame 13 is covered by the back pack unit 15 from behind. The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 201, and a payout mechanism 202, a discharge passage board 203, and a control device assembling unit 204 are attached to the back pack 201.

  The back pack 201 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and includes a base 211 to which the payout mechanism 202 and the like are attached, and a protective cover 212 projecting rearward from the pachinko machine 10 and having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. The protective cover 212 has a shape in which the left and right side surfaces and the upper surface are closed and only the lower surface is opened, and has a size sufficient to surround at least the variable display unit 67.

  The external terminal board 213 is provided in the upper right part of the base part 211. Various output terminals are provided on the external terminal plate 213, and various signals are output to the management control device on the game hall side through these output terminals. The base portion 211 is provided with a pair of upper and lower locking pins at the right end when viewed from the back of the pachinko machine 10, and the locking pins are inserted into bearings 132 (specifically, bearings) provided on the inner frame 13. By doing so, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported with respect to the inner frame 13. In addition, a fastener for fastening to a fastening hole provided in the inner frame 13 is provided at a rotating tip portion of the base portion 211, and the fastening tool is fitted into the fastening hole by fitting the fastener into the fastening hole. The back pack unit 15 is fixed to the inner frame 13.

  The dispensing mechanism 202 is provided on the base 211 so as to bypass the protective cover 212. The payout mechanism 202 is provided with a tank 221 disposed at the top of the back pack 201 and opening upward, and game balls supplied from island facilities in the game hall are sequentially supplied to the tank 221. You. A tank rail gently inclined toward the downstream side is connected below the tank 221, and a case rail extending vertically is connected to the downstream side of the tank rail. A payout device 222 is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail. The game balls paid out from the payout device 222 are supplied to a game ball distribution unit 252 (see FIG. 11) provided on the base unit 211 of the backpack 201 through a payout passage provided on the downstream side of the payout device 222. Is done.

  The configuration of the payout device 222 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a longitudinal sectional view showing a passage structure formed inside the dispensing device 222. In FIG. 5, the game balls that sulfide the inside of the payout device 222 are indicated by two-dot chain lines.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the housing 222a of the payout device 222 is formed at its upper end with a game ball inlet 222b for taking in game balls supplied from the tank 76 side, and further inside the game ball inlet 222b. A game ball passage 222c is provided for passing game balls entered from the entrance 222b.

  The game ball passage 222c communicates with a game ball outlet 222d formed at the lower end of the housing 222a, and game balls entering from the game ball inlet 222b flow down one by one toward the game ball outlet 222d. An accommodation portion whose passage width is widened left and right is provided in an intermediate portion of the game ball passage 222c, and a rotator 222e is accommodated in the accommodation portion. The center of the rotating body 222e is fixed to the output shaft 222f of the payout motor. In addition, recesses 222g are formed at two locations on the periphery of the rotating body 222e at 180 ° intervals. When the game ball flowing down the game ball passage 222c reaches the concave portion 222g of the rotating body 222e, the game ball is drawn out downstream with the rotation of the rotating body 222e.

  The payout motor is constituted by a stepping motor, and the output shaft 222f is driven to rotate in a predetermined direction. The driving of the payout motor is controlled by a payout control device 181 described later. In this case, when the payout motor is continuously driven at a normal speed in a state where the game balls are continuously supplied from the tank 76 side, one game ball is paid out at a cycle of 30 msec.

  In the game ball passage 222c, a payout ball detection sensor 222h having a substantially flat plate shape is installed at a position downstream of the accommodation portion. The payout ball detection sensor 222h is configured by a well-known magnetic detection type proximity sensor, and converts a change in a magnetic field caused by a game ball passing through a through hole of the detection unit into an electric signal and outputs the electric signal. Note that the payout ball detection sensor 222h is not limited to a magnetic detection type proximity sensor, and is optional as long as it can detect a game ball. For example, a photo sensor or a limit sensor may be used. . The payout ball detection sensor 222h outputs an electric signal to the payout control device 181. Specifically, a LOW level signal is output when a game ball is not detected, and an HI level signal is output when a game ball is detected. Note that the relationship between the output levels may be reversed. The number of game balls paid out through the payout device 222 can be confirmed by the payout ball detection sensor 222h.

  As shown in FIG. 3, a discharge passage board 203 and a control device assembling unit 204 are attached to the lower end of the base 211 so as to sandwich the lower end back and forth. The discharge passage panel 203 is provided with a discharge passage that is opened rearward on a surface facing the control device aggregation unit 204, and the opening of the discharge passage is closed by the control device aggregation unit 204. The discharge passage is formed so as to discharge the game balls to the island facilities and the like of the game hall, and the game balls led out to the discharge passage from the above-described collection passage and the like pass through the discharge passage to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. Is discharged.

  The control device assembling unit 204 has a horizontally long mounting base, on which the dispensing control device 181 and the power supply / emission control device 191 are mounted. The payout control device 181 and the power supply / launch control device 191 are arranged in front and back such that the payout control device 181 is located behind the pachinko machine 10.

  In the dispensing control device 181, a dispensing control board for controlling the dispensing device 222 is accommodated in a substrate box, and a state reset switch provided on the dispensing control substrate protrudes outside the substrate box. For example, if a state return switch is pressed at the time of a payout error such as a clogged ball in the payout device 222, the clogged ball is eliminated.

  The power supply / launch control device 191 contains a power supply / launch control board in a board box. The board generates and outputs a predetermined power required by various control devices and the like, and furthermore, a game ball launch by a player. The control of launching the game ball in accordance with the operation of the handle 41 is performed. The power / emission control device 191 is provided with a RAM erase switch. The pachinko machine 10 has a function of storing and holding various data, so that even if a power failure occurs, the state at the time of the power failure is maintained, and when returning from the power failure, it can be returned to the state at the time of the power failure. Has become. Therefore, for example, when the power is turned off in a normal procedure as in the case of closing the game hall, the state before the power is turned off is stored and held. However, when the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch, the RAM data is initialized. It has become.

<Front door frame 14>
Next, the configuration of the front door frame 14 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective view of the front door frame 14, and FIG. 7 is a front view of the front door frame 14.

  As shown in FIG. 6, the front door frame 14 includes a base frame 231 as a base member supporting the window panel section 22, an upper front cover 232 provided above the window panel section 22, and a window panel section. 22, a lower front cover 235 provided below the window panel 22, an upper plate unit 236 provided below the window panel 22, And a lower plate unit 237 provided below the upper plate unit 236.

  The covers 232 to 235 and the units 236 and 237 are detachably attached to the base frame 231 while covering the base frame 231 from the front. The covers 232 to 235 and the units 236 and 237 are attached to the base frame 231 by reversible screw members such as screws being screwed to the covers 232 to 235 and the units 236 and 237 from the back side of the base frame 231. It is fixed for.

  The base frame 231 is made of a synthetic resin such as an ABS resin, and is formed in a plate shape as a whole, and has an outer shape substantially the same as that of the inner frame 13. The base frame 231 is provided with a through-hole forming the window 21, and the window panel 22 is attached to the through-hole. Note that shaft fittings are attached to upper and lower ends of one side of the front surface of the base frame 231, and these shaft fittings are rotatably supported by the support fittings 51 and 52 of the inner frame 13.

  A plurality of LED boards having a large number of LEDs are attached to the base frame 231, and the upper front cover 232 and the side front covers 233, 234 are arranged at positions covering these LED boards from the front, so that a ring lamp is provided. A part 26 is formed. In particular, the upper front cover 232 forms the error display lamp section 27, and the side front covers 233, 234 form the prize ball lamp section.

  The upper front cover 232 and the side front covers 233, 234 are formed by combining a plurality of synthetic resin members formed of ABS resin, polycarbonate, acrylic resin, or the like, and are undulated forward and backward by each of these synthetic resin members. Is given. Note that any or all of the upper front cover 232 and the side front covers 233 and 234 may be formed of a single synthetic resin material, and each synthetic resin member may be formed of a single synthetic resin material. It may be formed.

  The upper speaker section 29 has an upper speaker 29a attached to an upper portion of the base frame 231. The upper speaker 29 a is provided so as to be inserted into an opening formed in the base frame 231, and is arranged such that a front portion thereof is hooked on a front surface of the base frame 231. In the upper speaker section 29, the upper speaker 29a is covered from the front by the upper front cover 232, and is not exposed to the front. On the other hand, a number of speaker holes are formed in the upper front cover 232 at a portion facing the upper speaker 29a, and the sound output from the upper speaker 29a is emitted forward through the speaker holes. I have.

  The lower front cover 235 is provided with an insertion hole penetrating the lower front cover 235 back and forth, and the cylinder lock 58 of the inner frame 13 is inserted through the insertion hole, so that the front side of the pachinko machine 10 is provided. It is exposed to. The lower front cover 235 may be provided integrally with the upper plate unit 236 and the lower plate unit 237.

  The upper plate unit 236 has an upper bulge 31 (upper plate 33), and the lower plate unit 237 has a lower bulge 32 (lower plate 34). In the base frame 231, a reinforcing plate made of a metal material is provided at a mounting position of the upper plate unit 236 and the lower plate unit 237, and the support strength of the upper plate unit 236 and the lower plate unit 237 by the base frame 231. Has been raised.

  The upper plate unit 236 has an upper plate base portion 236a stacked on the front surface of the base frame 231, and the upper bulging portion 31 bulges forward from the upper plate base portion 236a. The upper plate base 236a is provided with two openings at the back of the storage area of the upper plate 33, one of which forms a ball inlet 33a and the other forms a ball outlet 33b. ing. The ball entrance 33a and the ball exit 33b are arranged side by side, and in the width direction of the front door frame 14, the ball entrance 33a is disposed at a position near one end of the upper plate 33, and the ball exit 33b is located at a position near the other end. Is arranged. Note that two openings are also formed in the base frame 231 corresponding to the ball inlet 33a and the ball outlet 33b.

  The upper plate unit 236 is provided with a ball lending operation device 239. The ball lending operation device 239 includes a ball lending button, a return button, and a frequency display unit. With bills, cards, and the like inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, ball lending operation, card return operation, and confirmation of card frequency can be performed by the ball lending operation device 239. . That is, the ball lending button is operated to obtain a lending ball, and the lending ball is paid out as long as the remaining amount of the inserted bills, cards, and the like exists. The return button is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. The frequency display unit displays the balance information of a card or the like.

  In a pachinko machine (so-called cash machine) in which game balls are lent directly from the ball lending device to the upper plate 33 without the intervention of a card unit, the ball lending operation device 239 is not required. A decorative seal or the like is attached to a portion where the device 239 is installed.

  In addition, the ball lending operation device 239 is provided with a ball removal button 241. As shown in FIG. 7, the upper plate unit 236 and the lower plate unit 237 are provided with a ball-passing passage 242 that connects the ball outlet 33b of the upper plate 33 and the second ball inlet 34b of the lower plate 34. The entrance portion of the ball emptying passage 242 is basically closed by a ball stopper device built in the upper plate 33, and a ball emptying button 241 provided to project upward from the upper surface of the ball lending operation device 239 is pressed. As a result, the ball stopping device is opened, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 33 are discharged to the lower plate 34 through the ball removing passage 242. It should be noted that the ball-pulling button 241 may be provided separately from the ball lending operation device 239.

<Lower plate 34>
The lower plate 34 will be described in detail. The following description refers to FIGS. 8 is a sectional view taken along line AA of FIG. 7, and FIG. 9 is a sectional view taken along line BB of FIG.

  The lower plate unit 237 has a lower plate base portion 237a stacked on the front surface of the base frame 231, and the lower bulging portion 32 bulges forward from the lower plate base portion 237a. The lower plate 34 is formed so as to dent the lower bulging portion 32 from above. The lower plate 34 is a part of the lower plate base portion 237a, and a rear wall portion 243 and a forward end from a lower end of the rear wall portion 243. An extended bottom portion 244 and an enclosing wall portion 245 that surrounds the periphery of the bottom portion 244 together with the back wall portion 243 and makes the lower plate 34 open upward are provided.

  The back wall portion 243 is continuous with the bottom of the upper plate 33, and has a height dimension for a number of game balls. The first ball inlet 34a and the second ball inlet 34b are square (or substantially square) openings provided in the back wall portion 243, and open toward the front of the pachinko machine 10. The first ball entrance 34a is connected to the downstream end of the front door side lower plate passage portion 273 of the front door side passage unit 45, and the game ball flowing down the front door side lower plate passage portion 273 is the first ball. It is discharged to the lower plate 34 from the inlet 34a. In this case, the first ball inlet 34a is included in the lower plate passage in addition to the back pack side lower plate passage 259, the inner frame side lower plate passage 263, and the front door side lower plate passage 273. .

  The game balls paid out from the payout device 222 in a state where the upper plate 33 is full are discharged to the lower plate 34 through the first ball inlet 34a. As described above, the upper plate unit 236 and the lower plate unit 237 are provided with the ball removing passage 242, and the ball outlet of the ball removing passage 242 is the second ball inlet 34b. Incidentally, the ball emptying passage 242 is incorporated in the back wall portion 243 in the lower plate unit 237 (see FIG. 9 and the like). When the ball-pulling button 241 is pressed, the ball stopping device is opened, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 33 are discharged to the lower plate 34 through the ball-pulling passage 242.

  The first ball entrance 34a is formed at the center in the left-right direction in the back wall portion 243, and has an opening dimension that allows a plurality of game balls to pass in a state of being lined up in the left-right direction and the up-down direction. Specifically, the left-right direction is for three game balls, and the up-down direction is for two game balls. On the other hand, the second ball inlet 34b is formed on the back wall 243 on the side (specifically, on the right) of the first ball inlet 34a. Further, both the first ball inlet 34a and the second ball inlet 34b are located at positions separated upward from the bottom 244, and the lower edges of the first ball inlet 34a and the second ball inlet 34b are And at least one game ball above. More specifically, the lower edge of the first ball entrance 34a is located above the bottom 244 by approximately two game balls. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be employed in which 1.5 or more game balls, 2.5 or more game balls, or 3 or more game balls are located above.

  Since the first ball entrance 34a has a function of discharging the game balls paid out from the payout device 222 to the lower plate 34 as described above, for example, in the case of a big hit state, a large number of game balls are released in a short period of time. In some cases, the ball passes through the one-ball entrance 34a, and these many game balls are stored in the lower plate 34. In this case, by forming the first ball inlet 34a at a position spaced apart upward from the bottom 244, even if a large number of game balls are stored on the bottom 244, the first ball inlet 34a is closed by these game balls. The one-ball entrance 34a is prevented from being closed, and even in this situation, the game balls can be satisfactorily discharged to the lower plate 34 through the first-ball entrance 34a.

  As shown in FIG. 8, the bottom surface of the first ball inlet 34 a has a stepped portion extending in the width direction of the first ball inlet 34 a, and the stepped portion is located rearward from the bottom 244 of the lower plate 34. At the retracted position, the retracted surface 246a extends forward in the up-down direction. The bottom surface of the first ball inlet 34a extends upward from the upper end of the retreating surface 246a toward the rear (the bottom surface of the downstream end of the front door side lower plate passage portion 273), and forward from the lower end of the retreating surface 246a. (A bottom portion 244 of the lower plate 34). The cross-sectional area of the first ball inlet 34a is gradually increased from the front door side lower plate passage portion 273 toward the lower plate 34 due to the presence of the step portion (retreat surface 246a).

  The receding surface 246a has the same horizontal dimension as the horizontal dimension of the first ball entrance 34a, and is specifically equivalent to two game balls. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and may be a left-right dimension that allows two or more game balls to enter side by side. In addition, the retreat surface 246a is retreated by at least one game ball with respect to the other surface of the back wall portion 243. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured to retreat two game balls or more. In addition, the retreat surface 246a stores the game balls discharged from the first ball entrance 34a in a region in front of the game balls arranged over the game balls arranged along the retreat surface 246a. As described above, the height with respect to the bottom 244 and the inclination angle with respect to the bottom 244 are set. Specifically, the height with respect to the bottom 244 is approximately two game balls (substantially a plurality of game balls), and is substantially perpendicular to the bottom 244. In addition, without being limited to this, the game ball discharged from the first ball entrance 34a passes over the game ball arranged along the retreat surface 246a and is located in a region in front of the game balls arranged. If stored, the height with respect to the bottom 244 and the inclination angle with respect to the bottom 244 are arbitrary. Since the retreat surface 246a is formed as described above, the storage capacity of the game balls in the lower plate 34 is ensured accordingly.

  On the other hand, in the lower plate unit 237, since a part of the ball emptying passage 242 from the upper plate 33 is built in the back side of the back wall portion 243 as described above, the receding surface 246a is provided on the bottom surface of the first ball inlet 34a. With the formation, the effect of securing the storage capacity of the game balls in the lower plate 34 can be obtained while securing the space for incorporating a part of the ball empty passage 242 in the back wall portion 243.

  As will be described later, the pachinko machine 10 has a return ball which is fired from the game ball firing mechanism 110 but does not reach the game area and flows backward on the guide rail 100 formed by the inner and outer rails 101 and 102. A foul ball passage 118 is provided for collecting and discharging the collected game balls to the lower plate 34. The foul ball passage 118 is joined to the ball removal passage 242 on the back side of the back wall portion 243, and The game ball that has passed through the passage 118 is discharged to the lower plate 34 from the second ball inlet 34b. That is, a part of the passage including the foul ball passage 118 through which the return ball passes is built in the back wall 243. In this configuration, as described above, by forming the receding surface 246a on the bottom surface of the first ball inlet 34a, it is possible to allow the merging of the ball empty passage 242 and the foul ball passage 118 with a sufficient space. The effect of securing the storage capacity of the game balls in the lower plate 34 can be obtained. Further, in the lower plate unit 237, an installation space for wiring of electric components provided in the lower plate unit 237 is formed behind the back wall portion 243. On the other hand, by forming the receding surface 246a on the bottom surface of the first ball entrance 34a, it is possible to obtain the effect of securing the storage capacity of the game balls in the lower plate 34 while securing the installation space.

  Incidentally, as shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the ball hole 35 is disposed at the bottom 244 of the lower plate 34 at a position in front of the first ball inlet 34 a and provided on the front surface of the surrounding wall 245. It is closed in a natural state by a closing plate 37 which is opened by the ball pulling lever 36. The upper surface of the bottom portion 244 is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the hole 35. In other words, the game balls stored in the lower plate 34 naturally move toward the ball hole 35. In this configuration, when only a relatively small number of game balls are stored in the lower plate 34, the game balls are located on the closing plate 37. In this case, as described above, since the receding surface 246a is formed at a position behind the closing plate 37 in the back wall portion 243, the space behind the closing plate 37 when the hand is inserted toward the closing plate 37 is formed. Clearly, the game balls located on the closing plate 37 can be taken out by hand. That is, the receding surface 246a not only has an effect of securing the storage capacity of the lower plate 34, but also has an effect of improving the removal of the game ball from the lower plate 34 by hand as described above.

  In the configuration in which the receding surface 246a is formed as described above, as shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the first ball inlet 34a has an upper tapered surface 247a extending obliquely upward and forward as a ceiling surface. And a pair of side tapered side surfaces 247b extending diagonally toward the outside of the first ball inlet 34a. In this case, the cross-sectional area of the first ball inlet 34a is reduced by the upper tapered surface 247a and the side tapered surface 247b from the front door side lower plate passage portion 273 to the lower plate including the stepped bottom surface. 34, the rate of increase is greater than the rate of increase of the front door side lower plate passage 273. Specifically, the cross-sectional area of the first ball inlet 34a increases exponentially toward the lower plate 34.

  In the configuration in which the retreating surface 246a is formed at the first ball entrance 34a, the game ball may wait at a location recessed toward the retreating surface 246a. On the other hand, since the tapered surfaces 247a and 247b are formed as described above, it is easy to insert a hand into a recessed portion on the retreating surface 246a side, and to easily remove a game ball waiting at the location. Become. In addition, by using a tapered surface instead of a simple retreating surface, it is possible to secure a wider space for housing the back wall portion 243 as compared with a configuration using a simple retreating surface.

  The surrounding wall portion 245 is formed so as to regulate the front edge and the left and right edges of the bottom portion 244. The height of the surrounding wall 245 is smaller than that of the rear wall 243, and the height of the surrounding wall 245 is smaller on the front side than on the rear side. As shown in FIG. 7, a front region 248 of the surrounding wall portion 245 including a front end portion of the surrounding wall portion 245 is arranged in front of and behind the first ball inlet 34a in a front view of the pachinko machine 10, and is arranged in the left-right direction. Are approximately the same in a predetermined range.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 8, the height dimension of the front region 248 with respect to the bottom 244 is set such that the upper end is located lower than the lower end of the first ball inlet 34a. With this configuration, it is possible to ensure a long distance from the lower surface of the upper plate 33 to the front region 248 of the lower plate 34. 7, the lower surface of the upper plate 33 is formed so as to be depressed upward as shown in FIG. 7, so that the lower surface of the upper plate 33 is located on the front side of the lower plate 34. A long distance to the region 248 is ensured. The game balls stored in the lower plate 34 may be taken out from between the upper plate 33 and the lower plate 34 and replenished to the upper plate 33. In this case, the lower surface of the lower plate 34 By ensuring a long distance to the front area 248, the workability of the replenishment work is improved. Particularly, in the pachinko machine 10, the game area is expanded, and accordingly, the distance between the upper plate 33 and the lower plate 34 is reduced. On the other hand, by securing a long distance from the lower surface of the upper plate 33 to the front region 248 of the lower plate 34 as described above, the game area is expanded while suppressing the decrease in the workability of the refilling operation. Can be achieved. Incidentally, in the region other than the front region 248 in the surrounding wall portion 245, the upper end is located above the lower end of the first ball inlet 34a.

  In the configuration in which the height of the front region 248 is reduced as described above, the storage capacity of the lower plate 34 is correspondingly reduced. On the other hand, by forming the receding surface 246a on the back wall portion 243 as described above, the storage capacity of the lower plate 34 is prevented from becoming extremely small.

  In addition, since the front area 248 is located in front of the first ball entrance 34a, if the height dimension of the front area 248 is reduced, the game balls discharged from the first ball entrance 34a will have the discharged momentum. It is apprehended that the spilling over the lower plate 34 beyond the front side area 248 may occur. On the other hand, as described above, the receding surface 246a is formed on the back wall portion 243, so that the distance of the front region 248 to the first ball entrance 34a is long. Since the distance of the front region 248 to the first ball entrance 34a is long, the game ball discharged from the first ball entrance 34a has an opportunity to reduce the momentum before reaching the front region 248. A large amount will be given, and it will be suppressed that it spills out of the lower plate 34. Furthermore, a structure for reducing the momentum of the game balls discharged from the first ball inlet 34a is provided in a passage portion from the payout device 222 to the first ball inlet 34a. This will be described later.

<Lower speaker 30a>
Returning to the description of FIGS. 6 and 7, the lower speaker 30a has a lower speaker 30a attached to a lower portion of the base frame 231. A lower opening 231a is formed in the base frame 231 at a position below the ball entrance 33a (see FIG. 12). In the lower speaker 30a, the front portion is hooked on the front surface of the base frame 231. The back portion is inserted through the lower opening 231a. In the lower speaker section 30, the lower speaker 30a is covered from the front by the lower plate unit 237 so as not to be exposed to the front. On the other hand, the lower plate unit 237 is provided with a speaker cover 250 having a large number of speaker holes at a position facing the front portion of the lower speaker 30a, and is output from the front side of the lower speaker 30a. Sound is emitted forward through a number of speaker holes. In this case, the lower speaker section 30 has the lower speaker 30a and the speaker cover 250. In addition, the speaker hole of the speaker cover 250 corresponds to a sound emitting unit.

  The speaker cover 250 is arranged on the lower swelling portion 32 of the lower plate unit 237 to the left of the lower plate 34. The speaker cover 250 has a cover surface arranged obliquely upward and forward, so that a player can easily hear sounds emitted from the speaker holes. In the lower plate unit 237, the game ball firing handle 41 is provided to the right of the lower bulging portion 32 as described above, and the speaker cover 250 is separated from the game ball firing handle 41 with the lower plate 34 interposed therebetween. It is located on the opposite side.

  As shown in FIG. 9, the lower plate unit 237 has an internal space formed between the lower plate base portion 237a and the outer peripheral portion of the lower swelling portion 32. Openings 249a and 249b are formed at positions facing the front surface of the lower speaker 30a on the outer peripheral portion of the lower bulging portion 32, respectively. The speaker cover 250 is attached to the lower bulging portion 32 in a state where the bulging opening 249b formed in the lower bulging portion 32 is closed, and the sound output from the front side of the lower speaker 30a. Is transmitted to the internal space of the lower plate unit 237 through the base opening 249a of the lower plate base portion 237a, and further discharged forward through each speaker hole of the speaker cover 250.

  Incidentally, the speaker cover 250 may be provided integrally with the lower bulging portion 32. For example, in the lower bulging portion 32, a large number of speaker holes are formed at a position in front of the lower speaker 30a, and a portion in which these speaker holes are formed serves as a speaker cover 250.

  The lower speaker 30a is a dynamic speaker device, and corresponds to sound generating means for generating sound. The lower speaker 30a has a diaphragm 30b such as a cone-shaped cone paper and a voice coil 30c connected to the diaphragm 30b, and the lower speaker 30a may be referred to as a cone-type speaker unit. it can. The lower speaker 30a has a permanent magnet that operates the voice coil 30c in addition to the diaphragm 30b and the voice coil 30c. The permanent magnet has a hollow portion by being formed in a donut shape, and the voice coil 30c is provided in a state inserted into the hollow portion. In the lower speaker 30a, when the voice coil 30c is energized, the diaphragm 30b vibrates together with the voice coil 30c, and a sound is generated by the vibration of the diaphragm 30b. In this case, the sound output backward from the diaphragm 30b has an opposite phase to the sound output forward. In the lower speaker 30a, a drive unit is configured by a voice coil and a permanent magnet.

  In the lower speaker section 30, an enclosure 331 (see FIG. 21) is provided for the lower speaker 30a, and the lower speaker 30a has a front end in a state where the bass range of the sound output from the back side of the lower speaker 30a is enhanced. To be released. In this case, the lower speaker section 30 is a back load horn type speaker system including the lower speaker section 30 and the enclosure 331. In the enclosure 331, the middle and high range is easily attenuated and the low range is amplified. It is easier. Further, in the lower speaker unit 30, the front door side lower plate passage portion 273 is included in the enclosure 331, and the sound output from the rear side of the lower speaker 30a passes through the front door side lower plate passage portion 273. The lower plate 34 is discharged from the first ball inlet 34a.

  A detailed description of the lower speaker unit 30 will be described later.

<Passage configuration of game balls to upper plate 33 and lower plate 34>
Next, the configuration of the passage of the game ball to the upper plate 33 and the lower plate 34 will be described. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a passage configuration of a game ball. In FIG. 10, for convenience, the passage configuration on the inner frame 13 side and the back pack unit 15 side is shown in cross section.

  As described above, the payout device 222 is provided in the payout mechanism 202 that forms the back of the pachinko machine 10. A payout passage 251 extending in the up-down direction is formed below the payout device 222, and the game balls paid out from the payout device 222 flow down the payout passage 251 and are formed at the lower end of the payout mechanism 202. It is introduced into the distribution unit 252.

  The game ball distribution unit 252 has a function of distributing the game balls paid out from the payout device 222 to the upper plate 33 or the lower plate 34 provided on the front door frame 14. The configuration of the game ball distribution unit 252 will be described with reference to a longitudinal sectional view around the game ball distribution unit 252 shown in FIG. The game ball distribution unit 252 is open upward and forward, and the inside thereof is partitioned by two partition walls 253a, 253b, so that three openings 255a, 255b, 255c are juxtaposed in the left-right direction.

  Of these openings 255a, 255b and 255c, the opening 255a inside the pachinko machine 10 communicates with the upper plate passage leading to the upper plate 33, and the central opening 255b leads to the lower plate passage leading to the lower plate 34. I have. The opening 255c on the outside of the pachinko machine 10 communicates with the discharge passage, and in the discharging operation of the game balls stored in the tank 221, the stored game balls are guided to the discharge passage through the outside opening 255c. He is discharged out of the pachinko machine 10.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 10, the upper plate passage includes a back pack side upper plate passage portion 258 provided in the back pack unit 15, an inner frame side upper plate passage portion 262 provided in the inner frame 13, and a front door frame. 14 and a front door side upper plate passage portion 272 provided on the front side. Similarly, the lower plate passage is provided in the back pack side lower plate passage portion 259 provided in the back pack unit 15, the inner frame side lower plate passage portion 263 provided in the inner frame 13, and the front door frame 14. And a front door side lower plate passage portion 273.

  Each of these passage portions 258, 259, 262, 263, 272, 273 will be described in detail.

<Backpack side passage unit 257>
The back pack side upper plate passage portion 258 and the back pack side lower plate passage portion 259 are provided at the base end of the back pack unit 15 so as to penetrate the base portion 211 in the front-rear direction. 257. The back-pack-side upper plate passage portion 258 and the back-pack-side lower plate passage portion 259 are defined by passage walls and are arranged side by side in the left-right direction. The back pack side upper plate passage portion 258 and the back pack side lower plate passage portion 259 extend in the front-rear direction, respectively, and are inclined downward toward the downstream side. In the above configuration, the game balls introduced into the back pack side upper plate passage portion 258 and the back pack side lower plate passage portion 259 are rolled on the bottom portions 258a, 259a and then the inner frame side upper plate passage portion 262 and the inner frame side. It is discharged to each of the lower plate passage portions 263.

  Incidentally, the width dimension (dimension in the left-right direction) of the back-pack-side lower plate passage portion 259 is larger than that of the back-pack-side upper plate passage portion 258. This is for the following reason. In other words, the game balls paid out from the payout device 222 are guided to the opening 255a inside the game ball distribution unit 252 that continues to the back pack side upper plate passage 258. On the other hand, the game ball is filled into the inside opening 255a in the game ball distribution unit 252, and the game ball overflowing from the opening 255a is guided to the back pack side lower plate passage portion 259. Therefore, the trajectory of the game ball passing through the back pack side lower plate passage portion 259 becomes irregular as compared with the game ball passing through the back pack side upper plate passage portion 258, and the inside of the back pack side lower plate passage portion 259. There is a concern about ball clogging. On the other hand, in the limited space of the back pack side passage unit 257, the above-described ball clogging occurs by making the width dimension of the back pack side lower plate passage portion 259 larger than that of the back pack side upper plate passage portion 258. Is reduced. In addition, in order to reduce the probability that ball clogging occurs in the lower plate passage, not only the lower pack side lower plate passage portion 259 but also the inner frame side lower plate passage portion 263 and the front door side lower plate passage portion 273. The width dimension is larger than the upper plate passages 262 and 272. That is, the opening area is large.

<Inner frame side passage unit 121>
The inner frame side upper plate passage portion 262 and the inner frame side lower plate passage portion 263 are provided at the rotation base end side of the inner frame 13 so as to penetrate the inner frame base 50 in the front-rear direction. 121. The game board 60a is provided with a notch 267 at a corner thereof so as to avoid the inner frame side passage unit 121 (see FIG. 4).

  The inner frame side upper plate passage portion 262 and the inner frame side lower plate passage portion 263 are partitioned by a partition passage wall 264 and juxtaposed in the left-right direction, with the ball outlets 262a and 263a facing downward, respectively. Is formed. In detail, the upstream side of the inner frame side upper plate passage portion 262 and the inner frame side lower plate passage portion 263 is inclined downward toward the downstream side, and extends slightly downward at the downstream side to provide a ball outlet. 262a and 263a are formed. In the above configuration, the game balls introduced into the inner frame side upper plate passage portion 262 and the inner frame side lower plate passage portion 263 roll on the bottom portions 262b, 263b and pass through the ball exits 262a, 263a to the front door side upper plate passage. It is discharged to each of the section 272 and the front door side lower plate passage 273. Incidentally, the inner frame side upper plate passage portion 262 has a smaller width dimension (left-right dimension) than the inner frame side lower plate passage portion 263.

<Front door side passage unit 45>
As described above, the front door side passage unit 45 has the front door side upper plate passage portion 272 and the front door side lower plate passage portion 273. Here, the front door side passage unit 45 is shown in FIGS. 16 will be described. 12 is a perspective view showing a state where the front door side passage unit 45 is separated from the front door frame 14, FIG. 13 is a perspective view of the front door side passage unit 45, FIG. 14 is an exploded perspective view of the front door side passage unit 45, 15 is a front view of the front door side passage unit 45, FIG. 16 is a diagram showing an internal structure of the front door side passage unit 45, and FIG. 17 is a plan view of the front door side passage unit 45. In FIG. 16, the front door side upper plate passage 272 and the foul ball passage 118 are not shown.

  As shown in FIG. 14, the front door side passage unit 45 includes a pair of base plates 274a and 274b arranged in parallel, and a plurality of connecting plates 274c connecting the base plates 274a and 274b. I have. The base plates 274a and 274b and the connecting plate 274c are formed of a transparent synthetic resin material such as a polycarbonate resin. The pair of base plates 274a and 274b are arranged apart from each other in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10, and the respective connection plates 274c are extended over the pair of base plates 274a and 274b while extending in the front-rear direction. .

  Each connecting plate 274c is integrally formed with a front base plate 274a disposed on the front side (the base frame 231 side) of the pair of base plates 274a and 274b, and a rear base plate disposed on the rear side. 274b is fixed to the connecting plate 274c and the front base plate 274a by screws.

  In the front door side passage unit 45, a receiving portion 275 which forms the upstream end of the front door side upper plate passage portion 272 and the front door side lower plate passage portion 273 is formed. Also on the downstream side, a front door side passage forming portion 276 (see FIG. 12 and the like) forming the front door side lower plate passage portion 273 is formed. The front door-side upper plate passage portion 272 and the front door-side lower plate passage portion 273 are spaces defined by a connecting plate 274c between a pair of base plates 274a and 274b.

  The front door side passage unit 45 has a plate-shaped portion 271 in addition to the receiving portion 275 and the front door side passage forming portion 276. In the front door-side passage unit 45, the outlet 272 a of the front door-side upper plate passage portion 272 overlaps the ball entrance 33 a of the upper plate 33 before and after, and the outlet 273 a of the front door-side lower plate passage portion 273 corresponds to the lower plate 34. The pachinko machine 10 is screw-fixed to the rear surface of the front door frame 14 from behind the front door frame 14 so as to overlap with the one-ball entrance 34a. In this case, the plate-shaped portion 271 of the front door side passage unit 45 is in contact with the rear surface of the front door frame 14 in a state of being superimposed on the rear surface.

  Incidentally, reinforcing metal plates 301 and 302 are attached to the front door side passage unit 45. Among these reinforcing metal plates 301 and 302, the first reinforcing metal plate 301 is attached to the receiving portion 275. Further, the second reinforcing metal plate 302 is attached to the front door side passage forming portion 276. The receiving portion 275 communicates with the ball entrance 33 a of the upper plate 33, and the front door side passage forming portion 276 communicates with the first ball entrance 34 a of the lower plate 34. Therefore, an illegal jig is inserted from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the ball inlet 33a or the first ball inlet 34a, and furthermore, the wall of the receiving part 275 or the wall of the front door side passage forming part 276 is broken and inserted. It is assumed that an illegal jig intrudes into the game area or the back of the game board 60a. On the other hand, since the reinforcing metal plates 301 and 302 are attached as described above, even if the wall of the receiving part 275 or the wall of the front door side passage forming part 276 is broken, the illegal jig is not used. It is possible to prevent further intrusion.

  The receiving part 275 of the front door side passage unit 45 and the front door side passage forming part 276 will be described. The position where the receiving portion 275 is formed is an upper corner in the front door side passage unit 45, and is located on the rotation base end side of the front door frame 14 in relation to the front door frame 14. The receiving portion 275 protrudes rearward of the pachinko machine 10 from the front door side passage forming portion 276, and is further rearward of the pachinko machine 10 than the rotation axis of the front door frame 14. Then, in a state where the front door frame 14 is closed, the receiving portion 275 enters the rear side of the front end of the inner frame 13.

  However, the receiving portion 275 is located on the front side of the rear end of the inner frame 13, and the inner frame 13 (the inner frame base 50) has a projecting side of the receiving portion 275 at a position facing the receiving portion 275. (See FIG. 18). Therefore, when the front door frame 14 is closed, the receptacle 275 does not penetrate the inner frame 13 in the front-rear direction.

  The receiving portion 275 is opened upward as shown in FIG. 13 and the like, and a partition wall 277 that rises upward from the bottom is integrally formed substantially at the center in the left-right direction. By being partitioned by the partition wall 277, two openings 278 and 279 are provided in the socket 275 in parallel in the left-right direction. In such a configuration, a side wall inside the pachinko machine 10 in the receiving portion 275 is taller than a rear side of the pachinko machine 10 and the like, and an eave portion 275a is formed on the side wall. Due to the formation of the eaves 275a, the inner opening 278 inside the pachinko machine 10 out of the two openings 278 and 279 has a width dimension (lateral dimension) larger than the outer opening 279 outside the pachinko machine 10. Is getting smaller.

  The pachinko machine 10 inner opening 278 vertically faces the ball outlet 262a of the inner frame side upper plate passage 262, and serves as a ball inlet of the front door side upper plate passage 272 as shown in FIG. ing. The outside opening 279 of the pachinko machine 10 is vertically opposed to the ball outlet 263 a of the inner frame side lower plate passage 263, and the front door side lower plate passage 273 formed in the front door side passage forming portion 276. Ball entrance. In this case, as described above, since the receiving portion 275 enters the rear side of the front end of the inner frame 13, the boundary between the front door side upper plate passage portion 272 and the inner frame side upper plate passage portion 262 is provided. A part of a portion and a boundary portion between the front door side lower plate passage portion 273 and the inner frame side lower plate passage portion 263 partially enter the rear side of the front end portion of the inner frame 13 (see FIG. 10 and the like). ).

  The inner opening 278 and the ball entrance 33a of the upper plate 33 are arranged in front and rear, and the front door side upper plate passage 272 extends in the front-rear direction so as to connect the inner opening 278 and the ball entrance 33a. Note that the front door side upper plate passage portion 272 has a larger width (left-right size) toward the ball entrance 33 a of the upper plate 33.

  The outer opening 279 and the first ball inlet 34a of the lower plate 34 have a positional relationship shifted in the left-right direction and the up-down direction. That is, the outer opening 279 is on the rotation base end side of the front door frame 14, and the first ball entrance 34a of the lower plate 34 is near the center of the front door frame 14 in the left-right direction (see FIG. 12 and the like). Further, the first ball inlet 34a of the lower plate 34 is below the outer opening 279. A front door side lower plate passage portion 273 is formed so as to connect the outer opening 279 and the first ball inlet 34a of the lower plate 34. The front door side lower plate passage portion 273 extends along the back surface of the front door frame 14 and has a crank shape. More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the front door side lower plate passage portion 273 has an upper horizontal passage portion 284, a vertical passage portion 285, and a lower horizontal passage portion 286. By forming the front door side lower plate passage portion 273 in a crank shape in this way, the passage length is longer than in a configuration in which the front door side lower plate passage portion 273 is formed in a straight shape.

  The front door side lower plate passage portion 273 is a space having a rectangular cross section due to being partitioned by the connecting plate 274c between the pair of base plates 274a and 274b. In the front door-side lower plate passage portion 273, the upper horizontal passage portion 284 and the lower horizontal passage portion 286 extend obliquely downward toward the downstream at the same angle, and the game ball is formed by the respective horizontal passage portions 284 and 286. It flows down toward the downstream end. In the upper horizontal passage portion 284, the upstream end portion is disposed below the receiving portion 275, and the downstream end portion is disposed above the upstream end portion of the lower horizontal passage portion 286. The downstream end of the lower horizontal passage portion 286 is disposed behind the first ball inlet 34 a of the lower plate 34. The vertical passage portion 285 connects the downstream end of the upper horizontal passage portion 284 and the upstream end of the lower horizontal passage portion 286 while extending in the vertical direction.

  The front door side lower plate passage portion 273 is bent along the back surface of the base frame 231 and has a plurality of intermediate bent portions 304 as bent portions thereof. The intermediate bent portion 304 is formed at each of a connection portion between the upper horizontal passage portion 284 and the vertical passage portion 285 and a connection portion between the vertical passage portion 285 and the lower horizontal passage portion 286, and flows down from the upstream side. It is possible to reduce the falling speed of the coming game ball.

  In the front door side lower plate passage portion 273, the sectional area gradually increases as a whole from the upstream end portion of the upper horizontal passage portion 284 to the downstream end portion (exit 273a) of the lower horizontal passage portion 286. I have. That is, the front door side lower plate passage portion 273 is thicker toward the downstream side. In this case, since the pair of base plates 274a and 274b extend in parallel, the depth dimension of the front door-side lower plate passage portion 273 is set to be the same in the entire area, and on the other hand, The thickness dimension of the front door side lower plate passage portion 273 gradually increases as approaching the outlet 273a. Here, in the upper horizontal passage portion 284 and the lower horizontal passage portion 286, the height is set to the thickness, and in the vertical passage 285, the width is set to the thickness.

  The front door side lower plate passage portion 273 has a cross-sectional area that allows game balls to be arranged in a plurality of rows along the flowing direction. For example, the depth dimension (the separation distance between the pair of base plates 274a, 274b) of the front door side lower plate passage portion 273 is a size that allows two game balls to be arranged. Further, the thickness dimension of the front door side lower plate passage portion 273 is such that the upper horizontal passage portion 284 and the vertical passage portion 285 are such that two game balls can be lined up, and the lower horizontal passage portion 286 is provided. Has a size that allows three or more game balls to line up.

  In the front door side lower plate passage portion 273, each straight line portion of the passage portions 284 to 286 has a tapered shape gradually thickening toward the downstream side. In this case, in each of the straight portions of the upper horizontal passage portion 284 and the vertical passage portion 285, the cross-sectional area of the upstream end of the vertical passage portion 285 is equal to or smaller than the cross-sectional area of the downstream end of the upper horizontal passage portion 284. Has been made larger. In each of the straight portions of the vertical passage portion 285 and the lower horizontal passage portion 286, the cross-sectional area of the upstream end of the lower horizontal passage portion 286 is equal to or larger than the cross-sectional area of the downstream end of the vertical passage portion 285. Has been enlarged.

  The cross-sectional area of each intermediate bent portion 304 is substantially the same as the cross-sectional area of the upper and lower adjacent passage portions 284 to 286. For example, in the connection portion between the upper horizontal passage portion 284 and the vertical passage portion 285, the cross-sectional area of the intermediate bent portion 304 is the cross-sectional area of the downstream end of the straight portion of the upper horizontal passage portion 284 and the straight line of the vertical passage portion 285. It is almost the same as the cross-sectional area of the upstream end of the portion. In the connection portion between the vertical passage portion 285 and the lower horizontal passage portion 286, the cross-sectional area of the intermediate bent portion 304 is the cross-sectional area of the downstream end of the straight portion of the vertical passage portion 285 and the straight line of the lower horizontal passage portion 286. It is almost the same as the cross-sectional area of the upstream end of the portion.

  In the front door side lower plate passage portion 273, the downstream end of the lower horizontal passage portion 286 is arranged behind the first ball inlet 34 a of the lower plate 34, so that the game ball is not provided at the ball outlet. A downstream bent portion 305 is formed at the most downstream portion so that the flowing direction is directed toward the front of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 9). This downstream bent portion 305 is formed for the lower horizontal passage portion 286. That is, the downstream bent portion 305 includes the passage wall 306 having a surface orthogonal to the flowing direction of the game ball on the upstream side thereof. Therefore, the game balls flowing down the front door side lower plate passage portion 273 are discharged to the lower plate 34 through the first ball inlet 34a after hitting the passage wall 306 of the downstream bent portion 305 at the most downstream portion thereof. That is, the passage wall 306 has a function as a speed reduction unit. Thus, the momentum of the game balls discharged from the lower door passage portion 273 to the lower plate 34 is reduced immediately before being discharged to the lower plate 34. The bent portions 304 and 305 correspond to spherical corners.

  In a configuration in which the passage direction on the upstream side of the downstream bent portion 305 is not a horizontal direction but a vertical direction, the bottom of the downstream bent portion 305 has a function as the speed reduction portion. In other words, the deceleration unit has a surface that is orthogonal (substantially orthogonal) or intersects with the downflow direction of the game balls on the upstream side, and causes the game balls that have flowed down from the upstream side to collide with the surface and decelerate Any structure that has a function of guiding the lower plate 34 to the lower plate 34 after that may be used.

  Here, as described above, the height of the front region 248 of the surrounding wall portion 245 in the lower plate 34 is set to be small. In this case, there is a concern that the game ball discharged from the first ball inlet 34a may fall outside the lower plate 34 beyond the front area 248. On the other hand, the downstream bend portion 305 is formed in the front door side lower plate passage portion 273 as described above, and the game balls discharged from the front door side lower plate passage portion 273 to the lower plate 34 are placed in the lower plate 34. By reducing the momentum immediately before the ball is discharged, the game ball discharged from the first ball inlet 34a is prevented from spilling out of the lower plate 34 due to the discharged momentum.

  Incidentally, since the front door side lower plate passage portion 273 is integrated with the back surface of the front door frame 14 as the front door side passage unit 45, the position and lower position of the downstream bent portion 305 of the front door side lower plate passage portion 273 are reduced. It is possible to make the position of the plate 34 closer to the first ball inlet 34a. Therefore, it is possible to discharge the game ball to the lower plate 34 immediately after reducing the momentum of the flow at the downstream curved portion 305, and the effect of reducing the momentum at the downstream curved portion 305 is suitably exhibited. Assuming a configuration in which the front door side lower plate passage portion 273 is installed not on the front door frame 14 side but on the inner frame 13 side, the ball of the front door side lower plate passage portion 273 is opened when the front door frame 14 is opened to the inner frame 13. It becomes necessary to provide a shutter mechanism for closing the outlet. In this case, it is necessary to separate the downstream bent portion 305 from the first ball inlet 34a by an amount corresponding to the provision of the shutter mechanism. On the other hand, in the present pachinko machine 10, the front door side lower plate passage portion 273 is formed in the front door frame 14, thereby eliminating the need for the shutter mechanism, and as described above, the downstream bending portion 305 and the first ball inlet 34a. Can be brought closer to each other.

  Next, the flow of the game ball to the upper plate 33 and the lower plate 34 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 11, game balls are paid out from the payout device 222 toward the inner opening 255a of the game ball distribution unit 252. Therefore, the game balls paid out from the payout device 222 are discharged to the upper plate 33 through the upper plate passage constituted by the respective upper plate passage portions 258, 262, 272.

  However, when a large number of game balls are paid out from the payout device 222 and the upper plate 33 becomes full, and thereafter the payout of the game balls is continued, the game balls continue in the upper plate passage, as shown in FIG. Then, the entirety of the inner opening 255a of the game ball distribution unit 252 is filled with the game ball. In this state, the game balls paid out from the payout device 222 pass through the inner partition wall 253a in the game ball distribution unit 252 and enter the central opening 255b. Then, the game balls are discharged to the lower plate 34 through the lower plate passage constituted by the respective lower plate passage portions 259, 263, and 273.

<Full detection sensor 280>
Next, the fullness detection sensor 280 will be described.

  As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the front door side passage forming portion 276 is provided with a full detection sensor 280 so as to detect a game ball passing through the front door side lower plate passage portion 273. The fullness detection sensor 280 is configured by a magnetic detection type proximity sensor, and detects a change in a magnetic field when a game ball passes through the detection range, and outputs it as an electric signal. Note that the fullness detection sensor 280 is not limited to a magnetic detection type proximity sensor, and may use a photo sensor, a limit sensor, or the like.

  The fullness detection sensor 280 outputs an electric signal to the payout control device 181. The payout control device 181 stops the payout of the game balls by the payout device 222 based on the detection result of the fullness detection sensor 280. As a result, when the lower plate 34 becomes full and the game balls continue to the position of the full detection sensor 280 in the front door side lower plate passage portion 273, further payout of the game balls is stopped. The stoppage of the payout is released when the full state of the lower plate 34 is released and the game ball is no longer detected by the full detection sensor 280.

  Here, the full detection sensor 280 is provided for the upper horizontal passage portion 284 in the front door side lower plate passage portion 273. Specifically, a fullness detection sensor 280 is attached below the bottom wall of the lower horizontal passage portion 286. By providing the full detection sensor 280 for the lower horizontal passage portion 286 in this manner, even if the lower plate 34 is filled with game balls, the full detection is performed as long as the game balls do not wait at the position of the lower horizontal passage portion 286. The sensor 280 will not detect that the lower plate is full.

  In the configuration in which the position of the full detection sensor 280 is set as described above, the lower plate passage (the back plate side lower plate passage portion 259, the inner frame side lower plate passage portion 263, and the front door side lower plate passage portion 273) are full. The passage length on the upstream side of the detection sensor 280 is set such that when the lower plate 34 is full, the game ball row of game balls connected in the lower plate passage does not reach the position of the payout device 222. . That is, when the payout device 222 that pays out the game balls at the predetermined payout speed is stopped from paying out, there are game balls that have already been paid out from the payout device 222 and flow down toward the lower plate 34. obtain. In this case, even if the maximum number of gaming balls assumed as the already flowing gaming balls are arranged upstream of the fullness detection sensor 280 in the lower dish passage, the gaming ball row is It does not line up to the position.

<Shutter mechanism 291>
Next, the shutter mechanism 291 will be described. FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view of the shutter mechanism 291, and FIG. 19 is an explanatory view for explaining the operation of the shutter mechanism 291.

  In the present embodiment, the front door side passage unit 45 is provided for the front door frame 14 as described above. Further, the window panel portion 22 is provided on the front door frame 14 as described above. For example, when the front door frame 14 is opened in order to eliminate a ball clogging or the like in the game area and solve it, the window panel portion 22 is adjusted accordingly. The front door side passage unit 45 moves forward, and the passage portions 272 and 273 on the front door frame 14 side and the passage portions 262 and 263 on the inner frame 13 side are separated. When the front door frame 14 is opened, the upper plate 33 and the lower plate 34 are in a full state, and the game balls are waiting in the inner frame-side upper plate passage 262 and the inner frame-side lower plate passage 263. If it is performed in the state, the waiting game ball may not be received by the front door side upper plate passage portion 272 or the front door side lower plate passage portion 273 and may be scattered. On the other hand, a shutter mechanism 291 is provided to prevent the game balls from being scattered.

  The shutter mechanism 291 is provided on the front side of the inner frame 13. Specifically, a mounting portion 292 is formed below the inner frame side passage unit 121 in the inner frame base 50, and a shutter mechanism 291 is mounted on the mounting portion 292. The shutter mechanism 291 includes a shutter member 293, a coil spring 294, and a stopper 295.

  The shutter member 293 is formed in a substantially plate shape by a synthetic resin. A shaft hole 293a is formed in the lower end of the shutter member 293 so as to penetrate in the left-right direction, and a support shaft portion 292a having a shaft hole on the same axis as the shaft hole 293a is formed in the mounting portion 292. Since the support pin 296 is inserted and fixed in the shaft hole 293a and the support portion 292a of the shutter member 293, the shutter member 293 is rotatably supported in the front-rear direction with the lower end as an axis with respect to the mounting portion 292. I have.

  An extension 297 is formed at the upper end of the shutter member 293 so as to extend laterally from one end (the left end in the present embodiment), and is provided in front of the extension 297. Thus, a stopper 295 is provided. The stopper 295 is formed of a synthetic resin material, and is fixed to the mounting portion 292 with a screw. Further, the stopper 295 is formed with a shutter stopper 295a and a spring stopper 295b which is lower than the shutter stopper 295a and protrudes forward.

  A coil spring 294 is provided between the stopper 295 and the extension 297. The coil spring 294 has one end fixed to the spring stopper 295b and the other end fixed to the lower end of the extension 297, and is provided in an extended state. Therefore, a forward urging force is always applied to the shutter member 293, and the extension portion 297 is in a position where it contacts the shutter stopper 295a in the natural state of the shutter member 293. In this contact position, the upper end 298 of the shutter member 293 is below the inner frame side passage unit 121.

  The upper end 298 of the shutter member 293 has an upper surface with a predetermined curvature, is convex outward, and has an arc shape in the front-rear direction. The virtual center of this arc is the shaft hole 293a. The front and rear dimensions of the shutter member 293 are substantially the same as the front and rear dimensions of the ball outlets 262a and 263a of the inner frame side upper plate passage portion 262 and the inner frame side lower plate passage portion 263. The dimensions are substantially the same as the lateral dimensions of the inner frame side passage unit 121. The upper end 298 faces substantially the entirety of the ball outlets 262a and 263a of the inner frame side upper plate passage portion 262 and the inner frame side lower plate passage portion 263. That is, the ball outlets 262 a and 263 a of the inner frame side upper plate passage portion 262 and the inner frame side lower plate passage portion 263 are closed by the shutter member 293. This position is the closed position (blocking position) of the shutter member 293.

  A front step 298b is formed integrally with the upper end 298 so as to protrude forward. When the front step portion 298b moves to the closed position, the front step portion 298b moves to the boundary portion between the inner frame side upper plate passage portion 262 and the front door side upper plate passage portion 272 or the inner frame side lower plate passage portion 263 and the front door side. It has a function of pushing a game ball at a boundary portion with the lower plate passage portion 273 toward the receiving portion 275 side.

  A groove 298a extending in the front-rear direction is formed in the upper end 298 at a position halfway in the left-right direction. The position of the groove 298a corresponds to the position of the partition wall 277 in the receptacle 275. That is, a region inside the pachinko machine 10 from the groove 298a at the upper end 298 is a blocking region for the upper plate passage, and a region outside the pachinko machine 10 from the groove 298a is a blocking region for the lower plate passage. I have. When the shutter member 293 is in the closed position, the lower end portion 264a of the partition passage wall 264 that partitions the passage portions 262, 263 in the inner frame side passage unit 121 enters the groove 298a.

  An accommodation recess 292b that is recessed rearward is formed behind the shutter member 293 in the attachment portion 292. In addition, the shutter member 293 is located at a position where the front end surface thereof comes into contact with the receiving portion 275 of the front door side passage unit 45 when the front door frame 14 is closed, and when the front door frame 14 is closed as described above. The socket 275 is disposed below the inner frame side passage unit 121. Therefore, when the front door frame 14 is closed, the rear end of the socket 275 abuts against the front end surface of the shutter member 293, and a force against the urging force acts on the shutter member 293. Thus, the shutter member 293 rotates rearward and is housed in the housing recess 292b. This position is the open position (blocking release position) of the shutter member 293.

  The movement of the shutter member 293 in response to the opening operation of the front door frame 14 will be described. As shown in FIG. 19A, when the front door frame 14 is closed, the shutter member 293 is in the open position and the inner frame side The upper plate passage portion 262 and the front door side upper plate passage portion 272 communicate with each other, and the inner frame side lower plate passage portion 263 and the front door side lower plate passage portion 273 communicate with each other.

  When the front door frame 14 is opened, the shutter member 293 moves to the closed position as shown in FIG. As a result, the ball outlets 262a and 263a of the inner frame side upper plate passage portion 262 and the inner frame side lower plate passage portion 263 are closed, and the inner frame side upper plate passage portion 262 and the inner frame side lower plate passage portion 263 are played. Even if the front door frame 14 is opened while the ball is waiting, the waiting game ball is not scattered. Thereafter, when the front door frame 14 is closed, the state returns to the state of FIG.

  In this case, as described above, the inner frame side upper plate passage portion 262 and the inner frame side lower plate passage portion 263 are inclined downward toward the ball outlets 262a and 263a, respectively. Therefore, a part of the weight load of the game balls waiting in the passages 262 and 263 on the inner frame 13 side is received by the bottom portions 262b and 263b of the passages 262 and 263 on the inner frame 13 side. That is, the weight load of the waiting game balls on the shutter member 293 is reduced. Therefore, the opening and closing operation of the shutter member 293 is facilitated.

<Ball clogging suppression structure>
Next, a description will be given of a ball clogging suppression structure in the upper plate passage when the front door frame 14 is opened. FIG. 20 and FIG. 21 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the ball clogging suppression structure.

  As described above, when the front door frame 14 is opened, the passage portions 262 and 263 on the inner frame 13 side and the passage portions 272 and 273 on the front door frame 14 side are separated. In this case, if a game ball exists at the boundary between each of the passages 262 and 263 on the inner frame 13 side and each of the passages 272 and 273 on the front door frame 14 side, the game ball is connected to the inner frame side passage unit 121. A game ball may be present at a boundary portion with the front door side passage unit 45, and the game ball abuts on each of the inner frame side passage unit 121 and the front door side passage unit 45, and ball clogging occurs. Therefore, there is a possibility that the opening operation of the front door frame 14 cannot be performed smoothly. On the other hand, a ball clogging suppression structure is provided. As the ball clogging suppression structure, a first ball clogging suppression structure and a second ball clogging suppression structure are provided.

<First ball clogging suppression structure>
First, the first ball clogging suppression structure will be described with reference to FIG. When the front door frame 14 is closed, the openings 278 and 279 of the receiving portion 275 and the ball outlets 262a and 263a of the inner frame side passage unit 121 face each other (the upper plate in FIG. 20). Only the aisle side is shown). Here, near the ball outlets 262a and 263a of the inner frame side passage unit 121, as shown in FIG. 20, the lower end of the front side passage wall 265 is closer to the lower end of the partition passage wall 264 and the lower end of the side passage wall. Are also formed to be upward. As a result, a gap having a predetermined interval X1 exists between the open upper surface of the upwardly opened portion of the receiving portion 275 and the near side passage wall 265 of the inner frame side passage unit 121. Therefore, at the start of opening of the front door frame 14, a game ball is placed at the boundary between the passages 272, 273 on the front door frame 14 side and the passages 262, 263 on the inner frame 13 side (the position B1 in FIG. 20). Even if there is, the game ball hardly hits the near side passage wall 265 of the inner frame side passage unit 121. Therefore, the occurrence of ball clogging is suppressed, and the opening operation of the front door frame 14 can be performed smoothly.

  When the shutter member 293 is in the open position, the front step portion 298b of the shutter member 293 is located above the receiving portion 275 and enters the receiving portion 275 side. Then, when the shutter member 293 moves to the closed position, the front step portion 298b of the shutter member 293 is disposed within the range of the interval X1. Thus, as described above, when the shutter member 293 moves to the closed position, the boundary between the inner frame side upper plate passage portion 262 and the front door side upper plate passage portion 272 and the inner frame side lower plate passage portion 263 are provided. The game ball at the boundary between the front plate side lower plate passage portion 273 and the front door side is pushed into the receiving portion 275 side.

  In the configuration in which the lower end of the near side passage wall 265 is formed above the lower end of the partition passage wall 264 and the lower end of the side passage wall as described above, when the shutter member 293 is in the closed position, The game balls waiting in the passages 262 and 263 on the main body side are prevented from falling. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 19B, the distance L1 from the shaft hole 293a of the shutter member 293 to the lower end of the near side passage wall 265 and the distance L1 from the shaft hole 293a to the upper surface of the upper end 298 of the shutter member 293. The difference from the distance L2 is smaller than the diameter of the game ball (L1-L2 <R). Therefore, the gap between the two is smaller than the diameter of the game ball, and the waiting game ball does not fall.

  In particular, the difference between the distance L1 from the shaft hole 293a of the shutter member 293 to the lower end of the near side passage wall 265 and the distance L2 from the shaft hole 293a to the upper surface of the upper end 298 of the shutter member 293 is smaller than the radius of the game ball. Is also smaller (L1-L2 <R / 2). Therefore, the load of the waiting game ball is reliably received by the near side passage wall 265, and the falling of the game ball is reliably prevented.

<Second ball clogging suppression structure>
Next, the second ball clogging suppression structure will be described with reference to FIGS. The second ball blockage suppression structure is provided for each of the upper plate passage and the lower plate passage. Therefore, first, the second ball clogging suppression structure of the upper plate passage will be described.

  As described above, the receiving portion 275 is formed to protrude rearward from the back surface of the front door frame 14, and the receiving portion 275 is located rearward of the rotation shaft 282 of the front door frame 14 as shown in FIG. 21. It is in. Therefore, the rotation range of the outer opening portion 279 when the front door frame 14 is opened includes a part of the lower region of the inner frame side upper plate passage portion 262 as shown in FIG. Further, at an intermediate position in the opening of the front door frame 14, a part of each of the inner opening 278 and the outer opening 279 is located below the inner frame side upper plate passage 262. Then, in this state, the game ball in the inner opening 278 can move to the outer opening 279 through a region above the partition wall 277 of the receptacle 275.

  As shown in FIGS. 13 and 21, a recess 283 is formed in the partition wall 277 of the receiving portion 275 by being recessed downward from the upper end thereof. The concave portion 283 is formed from the middle position in the left-right direction of the partition wall 277 to the rear end portion, and its front-back dimension X2 is larger than the diameter R of the game ball (X2> R).

  As described above, the rotation range of the outer opening 279 of the receiving portion 275 is set, and the concave portion 283 is formed in the partition wall 277 of the receiving portion 275, so that the front door frame 14 is opened. At the start, the game ball is located at the boundary between the front door side upper plate passage portion 272 and the inner frame side upper plate passage portion 262 and closer to the inner frame side upper plate passage portion 262 (the position B2 in FIG. 20). Even so, the game ball can be retracted from the inside opening 278 side to the outside opening 279 side across the recess 283. Therefore, the occurrence of ball clogging is suppressed, and the opening operation of the front door frame 14 can be performed smoothly. However, the depth dimension of the recess 283 is X3, and the distance between the bottom of the recess 283 and the lower end of the partition passage wall 264 of the inner frame side passage unit 121 is smaller than the diameter R of the game ball. I have. Therefore, in the configuration in which the concave portion 283 is formed in the partition wall 277, when the front door frame 14 is closed, the game ball in the inner opening 278 is prevented from moving to the outer opening 279.

  Next, the second ball clogging suppression structure of the lower plate passage will be described.

  At the upper end of the receiving portion 275 on the side of the outer opening 279, a ball retreating portion 290 is formed integrally with the pachinko machine 10 so as to extend outward. In other words, the ball retreating part 290 is arranged side by side with the outside opening 279 on the rotation base end side of the front door frame 14 with respect to the outside opening 279. The ball evacuation portion 290 has a dish-like shape on which one game ball can be sufficiently placed, and its bottom 290 a is lower than the open upper surface of the outer opening 279 and the bottom of the outer opening 279. Above. However, when the front door frame 14 is closed, the ball retreating section 290 is formed so that game balls passing through the inner frame side lower plate passage 263 are not placed thereon. That is, the distance between the bottom part 290a of the ball retreating part 290 and the side wall part of the inner frame side passage unit 121 is smaller than the diameter of the game ball. It is preferable that such a distance be smaller than the radius of the game ball.

  The bottom 290 a of the ball retreat 290 is inclined downward toward the outer opening 279, and the ball retreat 290 communicates with the outer opening 279. Further, as described above, the receiving portion 275 is located behind the rotation shaft 282 of the front door frame 14, and the inner frame side lower plate passage is provided in the rotation range of the ball retracting portion 290 when the front door frame 14 is opened. A part of the lower region of the portion 263 is included.

  As described above, the ball retreating portion 290 is provided, and its rotation range is set as described above, so that when the front door frame 14 starts to be opened, the front door side lower plate passage portion 273 and the inner frame side lower plate Even if a game ball is located at a boundary portion with the passage portion 263 and closer to the inner frame side lower plate passage portion 263 (the position B3 in FIG. 21), the game ball can be retreated to the ball retreat portion 290. . That is, the game ball at this position hits the front side passage wall 265 of the inner frame side passage unit 121 at the time of the opening operation of the front door frame 14 and is pushed toward the ball retreating part 290, and thus retreats to the ball retreating part 290. Is done. Therefore, the occurrence of ball clogging is suppressed, and the opening operation of the front door frame 14 can be performed smoothly. Further, since the bottom 290a of the ball retreating part 290 is inclined downward toward the outer opening 279 as described above, the game ball retreated to the ball retreating part 290 enters the outer opening 279 by its own weight.

<Foul ball passage 118>
Next, the foul ball passage 118 will be described.

  In the front door side passage unit 45, as shown in FIG. 15 and the like, a foul ball passage forming portion 281 that forms the foul ball passage 118 is formed integrally with the receiving portion 275 and the front door side passage forming portion 276. ing. The foul ball passage forming portion 281 is provided inside the bent portion of the vertical passage portion 285 and the lower horizontal passage portion 286 in the front door side lower plate passage portion 273, and has a recovery port 281a opened upward. ing. The upper edge of the recovery port 281a is lower than the upper surface 287a of the upper wall 287 of the upper horizontal passage portion 284 and the vertical passage portion 285.

  When the front door frame 14 is closed to the inner frame 13, the collection port 281a of the foul ball passage forming section 281 is between the firing rail 112 of the game ball firing mechanism 110 and the inner and outer rails 101 and 102 of the game board 60a. It is located in. Therefore, the return ball which is fired from the game ball firing mechanism 110 but does not reach the game area, and flows backward on the guide rail 100 constituted by the inner and outer rails 101 and 102, flows from the recovery port 281a to the foul ball path forming section 281. Get in.

  The game ball that has entered the foul ball path forming unit 281 is discharged to the lower plate 34 through the foul ball path 118 formed in the foul ball path forming unit 281. The foul ball passage 118 has a passage width and a passage height slightly larger than that of one game ball, and a plurality of game balls are arranged in the passage width direction. Are prevented from accumulating. Further, the foul ball passage 118 has an outlet 118a at an end of the front door side passage unit 45 opposite to the receiving portion 275 side with the collection opening 281a as an inlet (see FIG. 14). The outlet 118a communicates with the second ball inlet 34b of the lower plate 34. Here, the second ball inlet 34b serves as a ball outlet of the ball emptying passage 242 from the upper plate 33 to the lower plate 34 as described above. That is, the foul ball passage 118 merges with the ball removal passage 242 on the downstream side, and the foul ball passage 118 and the ball removal passage 242 have the same ball outlet in the lower plate 34.

  As described above, the ball outlet of the front door side lower plate passage portion 273 is the first ball inlet 34a formed separately from the second ball inlet 34b in the lower plate 34. That is, the foul ball passage 118 is provided separately from the front door side lower plate passage portion 273, and the game ball introduced into the foul ball passage 118 is different from the game ball passing through the front door side lower plate passage portion 273. It is completely discharged to the lower plate 34 by another route. Here, in the lower plate 34, the second ball inlet 34b is formed at a position shifted in the left-right direction with respect to the first ball inlet 34a. In detail, the foul ball passage 118 is formed to extend outward (laterally) as viewed in the game ball flowing direction from the downstream side of the front door side lower plate passage portion 273, and this extended distance is provided. The second ball inlet 34b is located at a position shifted laterally from the first ball inlet 34a. Thus, when the game balls that have passed through the front door side lower plate passage portion 273 and the game balls that have passed through the foul ball passage 118 are simultaneously discharged to the lower plate 34, collision between the two game balls is avoided. Is done. When these game balls collide with each other, the game balls may bounce out of the lower plate 34 due to mutual bouncing. However, since the collision between the two game balls is avoided as described above, the risk of such a jump is reduced. ing.

  As shown in FIG. 15, the foul ball passage 118 extends in the left-right direction from the collection port 281a toward the side opposite to the second ball inlet 34b, and is then turned back through the turn-back portion 118b to form the second ball inlet 34b. It extends leftward and rightward. Thereby, the path length of the foul ball passage 118 is ensured to be long, and the number of game balls that can stand by in the foul ball passage 118 can be increased as much as possible. Further, as described above, the foul ball passage 118 is formed so as to extend outward (laterally) when viewed in the downstream direction of the game ball from the downstream side of the front door side lower plate passage portion 273, so that the lower side is formed. In the configuration in which the first ball inlet 34a and the second ball inlet 34b are shifted in the left-right direction by the plate 34, the length of the foul ball passage 118 can be ensured as long as possible. Note that a shock absorbing member such as a sponge member may be provided on the bottom surface of the foul ball passage 118 and an area opened upward by the collection port 281a. By providing the impact absorbing member, it is possible to absorb the impact of the return ball falling from above on the foul ball passage 118.

  The foul ball passage 118 is located above the front door side lower plate passage portion 273, and a region in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10 occupied by the foul ball passage 118 and a front and rear region of the pachinko machine 10 occupied by the front door side lower plate passage portion 273. The region in the direction overlaps the top and bottom. Accordingly, in the configuration in which the front door side passage unit 45 is provided with the front door side lower plate passage portion 273 and the foul ball passage 118, the physical size of the front door side passage unit 45 is reduced, that is, the front door side passage unit 45 is compact. Is achieved. Further, foul ball passage 118 is formed so that at least a part thereof extends along lower door passage portion 273 on the front door side. Also from this point, the physical size of the front door side passage unit 45 is reduced, that is, the front door side passage unit 45 is made compact.

<Ball receiving structure>
Next, a ball receiving structure at the time of opening the front door frame 14 will be described.

  The opening and closing of the front door frame 14 may be performed when the upper plate 33 is full. In this case, when the front door frame 14 is opened and closed in a state where the inside opening 278 of the receiving portion 275 is filled with the game ball, the game ball in the inside opening 278 is vibrated at the time of opening and closing. There is a possibility that the eaves portion 275a may get on and fall down. On the other hand, a ball receiving structure for the falling ball is provided.

  This ball receiving structure is provided in the front door side passage forming portion 276 of the front door side passage unit 45. In detail, as shown in FIGS. 15 to 17, the ball receiving structure is provided on the upper horizontal passage portion 284 and the upper wall 287 of the front door side lower plate passage portion 273 in the front door side passage formation portion 276 and the vertical passage portion 285. Is provided.

  The upper wall 287 passes under the inner opening 278 in the receiving portion 275, and gradually slopes down in the downward direction of the game ball in the front door side lower plate passage portion 273. The upper wall 287 is arranged left and right with respect to the inner opening 278 in plan view. In other words, it can be said that the upper wall 287 extends from the position below the inner opening 278 toward the front end of the rotation of the front door frame 14.

  At the rear end of the pachinko machine 10 on the upper wall 287, a protruding ridge 288 that extends from the upper surface 287a and extends in the left-right direction is integrally formed. At the front end of the pachinko machine 10 on the upper wall 287, there is a plate-shaped portion 271 of the front door side passage unit 45. With this configuration, a ball receiving passage 289 is formed between the protruding portion 288 and the plate-shaped portion 271 on the upper surface 287 a of the upper wall 287.

  Since the upper wall 287 is formed as described above, the ball receiving passage 289 extends from below the inner opening 278 in the receiving portion 275 toward the turning front end of the front door frame 14. It is inclined downward toward the moving tip. Here, as described above, the foul ball passage forming portion 281 is provided inside the bent portion between the vertical passage portion 285 and the lower horizontal passage portion 286 in the front door side lower plate passage portion 273, and the foul ball passage forming portion is provided. The upper edge of the opening 281 is lower than the upper surface 287 a of the upper wall 287. In other words, the ball receiving passage 289 has a foul ball passage forming portion 281 at its tip, and the upper edge of the opening of the foul ball passage forming portion 281 is lower than the ball receiving passage 289. Therefore, the ball receiving passage 289 communicates with the foul ball passage forming portion 281 and further communicates with the foul ball passage 118.

  Since the ball receiving passage 289 is provided as described above, even if the game ball falls down from the inner opening 278 due to vibration or the like when the front door frame 14 is opened and closed, the game ball is transferred to the ball receiving passage 289. Received by The received game balls flow down the ball receiving passage 289 and are introduced into the foul ball passage forming portion 281, and are discharged to the lower plate 34 through the foul ball passage 118. Thus, the falling ball can be discharged to the lower plate 34 without being scattered in the game hall or the like.

  In particular, it is considered that the falling ball falls from the inner opening 278 to the tip of the front door frame 14 due to the centrifugal force generated when the front door frame 14 rotates. In this case, as described above, since the ball receiving passage 289 is provided so as to extend from below the inner opening 278 toward the rotation front end, the ball receiving passage 289 is more likely to receive a falling ball. Also, even if a game ball falls from the inner opening 278 to the rotation base end side of the front door frame 14, the falling ball is received by the outer opening 279.

  In addition, the ball evacuation part 290 is provided in the receiving part 275 as mentioned above. Therefore, even if the spilled ball falls from the outer opening 279 to the rotation base end side of the front door frame 14 when the front door frame 14 is opened and closed, the spilled ball can be received by the ball retreating part 290. From this point, the ball retreating part 290 has not only a function as a ball clogging suppression structure but also a function as a ball receiving structure. When a falling ball falls from the outer opening 279 to the front end of the front door frame 14, the falling ball is received by the inner opening 278.

<Lower speaker section 30>
Next, the lower speaker unit 30 will be described with reference to FIGS. 9, 12, 14 to 16, and the like.

  As described above, in addition to the lower speaker 30 a and the speaker cover 250, the lower speaker unit 30 outputs the sound output from the rear side of the lower speaker 30 a to the front door side lower plate passage 273 and the first ball entrance. There is an enclosure 331 that discharges the pachinko machine forward through 34a. As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the enclosure 331 includes, in addition to the front door-side lower dish passage portion 273 and the first ball inlet 34 a, an air chamber 332 that houses a rear portion of the lower speaker 30 a, and a lower speaker The sound passage 333 guides the sound output from the air chamber 30a into the air chamber 332 to the lower door passage 273 on the front door side. The enclosure 331 (the first ball entrance 34a) corresponds to a sound emitting unit that emits sound in front of the pachinko machine.

  In the front door side passage unit 45, the front door side upper plate passage portion 272 and the foul ball passage 118 are not included in the enclosure 331. In addition, the front door side lower plate passage portion 273 forms a lower plate passage together with the inner frame side lower plate passage portion 263 and the back pack side lower plate passage portion 259, but in the present embodiment, the entire region of the lower plate passage is formed. Is not included in the enclosure 331, and only the front door side lower plate passage portion 273 of the lower plate passage is included in the enclosure 331. That is, the inner frame side lower plate passage portion 263 and the back pack side lower plate passage portion 259 are not included in the enclosure 331.

  The air chamber 332 and the sound passage 333 are included in the front door side passage unit 45 together with the front door side lower plate passage 273 and the like, and do not overlap the front door side lower plate passage 273 in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10. Are located in The air chamber 332 and the sound passage 333 are spaces defined by a connecting plate 274c between the pair of base plates 274a and 274b, similarly to the front door-side lower plate passage portion 273. Here, if the air chamber 332 and the sound passage 333 are collectively referred to as a sound guide path for guiding the sound output from the lower speaker 30a to the rear to the front door side lower plate passage portion 273, the front door side passage unit 45 has a sound guide path forming section 334 in which a sound guide path is formed in addition to the front door side path forming section 276 and the foul ball path forming section 281. The air chamber 332 and the sound passage 333 are, similarly to the front door side lower plate passage portion 273, separated by a pair of base plates 274a and 274b by a connecting plate 274c, and have a rectangular cross section. It has become.

  The sound guide path forming portion 334 is formed in a rectangular parallelepiped shape as a whole, and is disposed below the receiving portion 275 and beside the foul ball passage forming portion 281. Specifically, it is arranged below the upper horizontal passage portion 284 and beside the vertical passage portion 285 on the front door side lower plate passage portion 273. The sound guide path forming part 334 is adjacent to the front door side passage forming part 276 along the back surface of the base frame 231, and the upper end and one side end thereof are connected to the front door side passage forming part 276.

  As shown in FIGS. 9 and 12, in the front door frame 14, the lower speaker 30a is fixed to the base frame 231 in a state of being inserted into the lower opening 231a of the base frame 231 as described above. In this case, a front portion of the lower speaker 30a is hooked on a front surface of the base frame 231 and a rear portion thereof projects to a rear side of the base frame 231 through the lower opening 231a. The front door side passage unit 45 is disposed at a position where the air chamber 332 overlaps the lower speaker 30a in the front-rear direction.

  In the sound guide path forming portion 334, a speaker opening 336 that opens the air chamber 332 toward the base frame 231 is provided in the front base plate 274a of the pair of base plates 274a and 274b. The rear portion of 30a enters the air chamber 332 through the speaker opening 336. The protrusion dimension of the lower speaker 30a from the front base plate 274a is smaller than the distance between the front base plate 274a and the rear base plate 274b (the thickness of the air chamber 332). The rear portion is spaced forward from the rear base plate 274b.

  In this case, the lower speaker 30 a is not directly fixed to the front door side passage unit 45 but is indirectly fixed via the base frame 231 of the front door frame 14. In this case, the lower speaker 30a and the front door side passage unit 45 are firmly fixed to the base frame 231 independently of each other.

  Returning to the description of FIGS. 15 and 16, the sound passage 333 is provided below the upper horizontal passage portion 284 in the front door side passage unit 45 in a bent state. The sound passage 333 communicates with the front door side lower plate passage 273 and the air chamber 332, and is disposed between the front door side lower plate passage 273 and the air chamber 332. In this case, while the sound passage 333 is adjacent to both the front door side lower plate passage portion 273 and the air chamber 332, the air chamber 332 and the front door side lower plate passage portion 273 are not adjacent to each other. The sound passage 333 is separated from both the front door side lower plate passage portion 273 and the air chamber 332 by a connecting plate 274c.

  The front door side passage unit 45 includes an air chamber partition 341 that partitions the air chamber 332 and the sound passage 333, and a lower plate passage partition 342 that separates the front door side lower plate passage 273 and the sound passage 333. Have. The air chamber partition 341 and the lower plate passage partition 342 are each formed by a connecting plate 274c, and extend along the sound transmission direction in the sound passage 333. The lower plate passage partitioning portion 342 is disposed downstream of the air chamber partitioning portion 341 in a direction in which output sound from the lower speaker 30a is transmitted from the air chamber 332 to the front door side lower plate passage portion 273. . The lower plate passage partitioning part 342 is arranged on the inner peripheral side of the sound guide path forming part 334, while the air chamber partitioning part 341 is located at the boundary between the front door side passage forming part 276 and the sound guide path forming part 334. Extends along.

  The air chamber partition 341 is provided with an air chamber hole 343 that transmits sound from the air chamber 332 to the sound passage 333. The air chamber hole 343 is a communication hole that connects the air chamber 332 and the sound passage 333, and is disposed at an upstream end of the sound passage 333 in the transmission direction of the output sound from the lower speaker 30a. In the sound passage 333, the portion of the air chamber hole 343 can also be called a throat.

  On the other hand, the lower plate passage partitioning part 342 is provided with a lower plate passage hole 344 that transmits sound from the sound passage 333 to the front door side lower plate passage portion 273. The lower plate passage hole 344 is a communication hole that connects the front door side lower plate passage portion 273 and the sound passage 333, and is disposed at a downstream end of the sound passage 333. In this case, in the front door side lower plate passage portion 273, the lower plate passage hole 344 is located at a position away from the fullness detection sensor 280 on the upstream side in the flowing direction of the game ball. The lower plate passage hole 344 corresponds to a sound take-in hole for taking sound into the front door side lower plate passage portion 273.

  In the sound passage 333, as a whole, the cross-sectional area gradually increases from the air chamber hole 343, which is the upstream end, to the lower plate passage hole 344, which is the downstream end. In this case, as in the case of the front door side lower plate passage portion 273, the depth dimension of the sound passage 333 is the same in the entire area due to the pair of base plates 274a and 274b extending in parallel. On the other hand, the thickness dimension of the sound passage 333 gradually increases as approaching the lower plate passage hole 344. The sound passage 333 has a portion extending in the width direction of the pachinko machine 10 and a portion extending in the up-down direction. The portion extending in the width direction has a height dimension as a thickness dimension and extends in the up-down direction. In the portion, the width dimension is the thickness dimension.

  The sound passage 333 has a plurality of passage portions 351 to 352 linearly extending along the back surface of the base frame 231. Among the passage portions 351 to 352, the first passage portion 351 is disposed on the most upstream side in the sound transmission path from the air chamber 332, and is located downstream from the air chamber hole 343 (opposite to the air chamber 332). Extending towards. The third passage portion 353 is arranged at the most downstream side, and extends from the lower plate passage hole 344 toward the upstream side (the air chamber 332 side). The second passage 352 is disposed at an intermediate position of the sound passage 333, and connects the first passage 351 and the second passage.

  The first passage 351 and the second passage 352 extend along the air chamber 332, and are separated from the air chamber 332 by the air chamber partition 341. The first passage portion 351 is arranged on the side of the air chamber 332, and extends upward from an air chamber hole 343 arranged below the air chamber 332. The second passage 352 is disposed above the air chamber 332, and extends laterally from the upper end (downstream end) of the first passage 351 along the upper side of the air chamber 332.

  Here, the air chamber partition portion 341 includes a first portion 341a extending vertically along the first passage portion 351 and a second portion extending in the width direction of the air chamber 332 along the second passage portion 352. And the air chamber hole 343 penetrates the lower end of the first portion 341a. In the air chamber partition 341, the first portion 341 a partitions the air chamber 332 and the first passage 351 left and right, and the second portion 341 b vertically connects the air chamber 332 and the second passage 352. Partitioning.

  The third passage portion 353 extends along the upper horizontal passage portion 284 of the lower door passage portion 273 on the front door side, and is separated from the upper horizontal passage portion 284 by the lower plate passage partition portion 342. The third passage 353 is disposed below the upper horizontal passage 284, and extends laterally from the downstream end of the second passage 352 along the upper side of the second passage 352. In this case, the third passage 353 is placed on the second passage 352 and is separated from the second passage 352 by the sound passage partition 355. The sound passage partitioning portion 355 is formed by the connecting plate 274c, and extends along the boundary between the second passage portion 352 and the third passage portion 353. In this case, the sound passage partition 355 forms the floor of the third passage 353.

  Here, the lower plate passage partitioning portion 342 includes a horizontal portion 342a extending along the upper horizontal passage portion 284 of the front door side lower plate passage portion 273 and a vertical portion 342b extending along the vertical passage portion 285. have. The horizontal portion 342a extends along the boundary between the upper horizontal passage portion 284 and the third passage portion 353, thereby partitioning the upper horizontal passage portion 284 and the third passage portion 353 up and down. The floor of the lateral passage 284 and the ceiling of the third passage 353 are formed. The vertical portion 342b extends along the boundary between the vertical passage portion 285 and the first passage portion 351 and the third passage portion 353, so that the vertical passage portion 285, the first passage portion 351 and the third passage portion 352. 353 is divided into right and left.

  The lower plate passage hole 344 is formed in a vertical portion 342 b of the lower plate passage partitioning part 342. The sound passage partitioning portion 355 extends from the vertical portion 342b toward the side opposite to the vertical passage portion 285, and the lower plate passage hole 344 extends in the vertical direction, so that the horizontal portion 342a and the sound passage partitioning portion 355 extend. And it is hung over. The lower plate passage hole 344 extends downward from the horizontal portion 342a below the horizontal portion 342a, and a game ball flowing down from the upper horizontal passage portion 284 to the vertical passage portion 285 passes through the lower plate passage hole 344. Move away. In this case, in a state where the lower plate passage hole 344 extends downward from the downstream end of the upper horizontal passage portion 284, a position where a game ball flowing down the front door side lower plate passage portion 273 is difficult to contact, that is, This means that the game ball is arranged at a position separated from the flow path of the game ball. Since the lower plate passage hole 344 is arranged at the separated position, a suppression mechanism that suppresses a game ball from flowing out from the lower plate passage hole 344 is configured.

  In addition, the lower plate passage hole 344 is disposed at a position on the side surface portion of the vertical passage portion 285 at least partially overlapping with the linear portion of the vertical passage portion 285. Here, in the front door side passage unit 45, the side surface of the vertical passage portion 285 is formed by a pair of base plates 274a and 274b and the connection plate 274c, and the lower plate passage hole 344 is formed by the side surface of the vertical passage portion 285. Of the parts, they are arranged in a part formed by the connecting plate 274c.

  In the sound passage 333, each straight line portion of the passage portions 351 to 353 has a tapered shape gradually thickening toward the downstream side. In this case, in each straight portion of the first passage portion 351 and the second passage portion 352, the cross-sectional area of the upstream end of the second passage portion 352 is the same as the cross-sectional area of the downstream end of the first passage portion 351. Or larger. In each of the straight portions of the second passage portion 352 and the third passage portion 353, the cross-sectional area of the upstream end of the third passage portion 353 is equal to or larger than the cross-sectional area of the second passage portion 352. I have.

  The sound passage 333 is bent along the back surface of the base frame 231, and has a plurality of sound bent portions 357 as bent portions. The sound bending portion 357 is formed at each of a connection portion between the first passage portion 351 and the second passage portion 352 and a connection portion between the second passage portion 352 and the third passage portion 353, and the lower speaker 30a The sound output through the sound passage 333 and passing through the sound path 333 can be attenuated in the mid-high range. Note that the sound bending portion 357 corresponds to a sound corner portion. Further, in a connection portion between the second passage portion 352 and the third passage portion 353, the sound bending portion 357 corresponds to a folded portion where the third passage portion 353 is folded with respect to the second passage portion 352.

  Note that the cross-sectional area of each sound bend 357 is substantially the same as the cross-sectional area of the upper and lower adjacent passages 351 to 353. For example, in the connection portion between the first passage portion 351 and the second passage portion 352, the cross-sectional area of the sound bending portion 357 is the cross-sectional area of the downstream end of the straight portion of the first passage portion 351 and the second passage portion 352. Is substantially the same as the cross-sectional area of the upstream end portion of the straight line portion. In the connection portion between the second passage portion 352 and the third passage portion 353, the cross-sectional area of the sound bending portion 357 is the cross-sectional area of the downstream end of the straight portion of the second passage portion 352 and the third passage portion 353. Is substantially the same as the cross-sectional area of the upstream end portion of the straight line portion.

<Regulator 363>
The lower plate passage hole 344 has a size and shape that allow a game ball to enter. Specifically, the cross-sectional area of the lower plate passage hole 344 is equal to or larger than the cross-sectional area of the downstream end of the third passage portion 353, and the cross-sectional area of the vertical passage portion 285 is lower. The cross-sectional area of the dish passage hole 344 is equal to or larger than the cross-sectional area. For this reason, there is a concern that game balls flowing down the vertical passage portion 285 or game balls accumulated in the vertical passage portion 285 may enter the sound passage 333 through the lower plate passage hole 344 in the front door side lower plate passage portion 273. You.

  Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 14 to 16, the front door-side passage unit 45 includes a regulation member 363 as an outflow regulation unit that regulates the outflow of game balls from the front door-side lower plate passage 273 to the sound passage 333. Have. The regulating member 363 is an opening / closing body provided to be capable of opening and closing with respect to the lower plate passage hole 344. The regulating member 363 opens the lower plate passage hole 344 when in the open state, and opens the lower plate passage hole 344 when in the closed state. Is closed.

  The regulating member 363 is formed of a plate material, and can block transmission of sound in the air. When the regulating member 363 is in the closed state, the sound passage 333 is closed from the front door side lower plate passage portion 273 side, so that the game ball from the front door side lower plate passage portion 273 to the sound passage 333 is closed. In addition to restricting outflow, transmission of sound from the sound passage 333 to the front door side lower plate passage 273 is also regulated. Therefore, the closed state of the regulating member 363 corresponds to the regulated state for each of the outflow of the game ball and the transmission of the sound. In addition to the fact that the lower plate passage hole 344 is disposed on the side surface of the vertical passage portion 285, the restricting member 363 constitutes a suppression mechanism that suppresses the outflow of game balls from the lower plate passage hole 344. ing.

  The regulating member 363 is rotatably supported on the base plates 274a and 274b, and is opened and closed by rotating. The restricting member 363 is provided so as to span the pair of base plates 274a and 274b, and its rotation axis extends in the direction in which the base plates 274a and 274b are arranged (the thickness direction of the front door side passage unit 45). ing. In the regulating member 363, a rotation shaft is disposed at one end, and the rotation shaft is disposed side by side at the downstream end of the lower plate passage partitioning part 342.

  When in the closed state, the regulating member 363 has an end on which the rotating shaft is disposed as an upper end, and extends downward from the upper end. In this case, the regulating member 363 covers the lower plate passage hole 344 from the vertical passage portion 285 side in a state where the rotation front end portion (lower end portion) is arranged side by side at the downstream end portion of the sound passage partition portion 355. That is, the sound passage 333 is closed from the downstream side.

  At the upper end of the vertical portion 342b of the lower plate passage partition 342, a concave portion 364 recessed toward the sound passage partition 355 is formed. When the regulating member 363 is in the closed state, the rotating distal end of the regulating member 363 enters the concave portion 364 from the vertical passage portion 285 side, whereby the regulating member 363 is moved to the vertical passage portion 285 side. Not to protrude. In this case, in the regulating member 363, the plate surface on the vertical passage portion 285 side is in a state of being continuous with the inner peripheral surface of the vertical passage portion 285 (the surface of the vertical portion 342b on the vertical passage portion 285 side). This suppresses a change in the manner in which the game balls flow down in the vertical passage 285 due to the presence of the regulating member 363 in the closed state.

  In addition, the leading end of the regulating member 363 is caught in the concave portion 364 from the vertical passage portion 285 side, so that the leading end does not enter the sound passage 333. For this reason, for example, even when the lower plate 34 is full, even if the game balls are piled up in the lower horizontal passage portion 286 or the vertical passage portion 285, the regulating member 363 is pushed by the game ball and turned toward the sound passage 333 side. It can be prevented that the lower plate passage hole 344 is opened due to the movement.

  When the regulating member 363 is in the fully opened state among the opened states, the regulating member 363 is in a non-regulated state in which both the game ball and the sound are not restricted from passing through the lower plate passage hole 344. In this case, the regulating member 363 extends from the end having the rotation axis toward the side opposite to the horizontal portion 342a of the lower plate passage partitioning portion 342, and is disposed at a position overlapping the extension of the horizontal portion 342a. Have been. Therefore, transmission of sound from the sound passage 333 to the lower plate 34 through the vertical passage portion 285 is not blocked by the regulating member 363. The position when the regulating member 363 is in the fully open state corresponds to the partition position.

  Further, the regulating member 363 has the same thickness dimension as the lateral portion 342a. Therefore, the upper surface and the lower surface of the regulating member 363 are arranged on the extension of the upper surface and the lower surface of the horizontal portion 342a. In this case, in the regulating member 363 in the fully opened state, the upper surface thereof forms a surface that is continuous with the passage surface 284a (the upper surface of the lateral portion 342a) of the upper horizontal passage portion 284, and the lower surface thereof forms the ceiling of the third passage portion 353. This means that a continuous surface is formed on the surface (the lower surface of the horizontal portion 342a).

  Further, when in the fully opened state, the regulating member 363 extends in the width direction of the vertical passage 285, and is in a partition state in which the vertical passage 285 is vertically divided. In this case, the restricting member 363 restricts the sound transmitted from the sound passage 333 to the vertical passage 285 from proceeding to the upstream side (the upper horizontal passage 284 side) and the downstream side (the lower horizontal passage 286 side). No restrictions on proceeding to ()). Therefore, when the regulating member 363 is in the partition state, the direction of sound transmission from the sound passage 333 is limited to the lower plate 34 side. Further, in this case, the regulating member 363 is arranged at a position overlapping the flow path of the game ball flowing down the front door side lower plate passage 273. The regulating member 363 corresponds to a partition in addition to the outflow regulating portion and the opening / closing body.

  By the way, even when the regulating member 363 is in the open state, if the opening degree to the lower plate passage hole 344 is large enough to restrict the outflow of the game ball from the lower plate passage hole 344, the game ball to the sound passage 333 can be opened. You are in a state of regulation that regulates outflow. In addition, if the opening degree is large enough to restrict the transmission of sound from the front door side lower plate passage 273, it means that the vehicle is in a state of restricting the transmission of sound to the front door side lower plate passage 273. .

  The front door side passage unit 45 has an urging member for urging the regulating member 363 to a fully open state. The urging member is a torsion spring or the like provided on the rotation axis of the regulating member 363. When the game ball is placed on the regulating member 363, the urging member is smaller than the load applied to the regulating member 363 from the game ball. Has a small biasing force.

  Further, the front door side passage unit 45 has a rotation stopper 365 that regulates the rotation of the regulating member 363 from a fully opened state (partitioned state) to a direction in which the opening degree is further increased. The rotation stopper 365 is a protrusion protruding inward from the inner peripheral surface of the front door side passage forming portion 276, and extends along the depth direction of the front door side lower plate passage portion 273 to form a pair of rotation stoppers 365. It is in a state of being bridged over the base plates 274a and 274b. The restricting member 363 is held in a fully open state against the urging force of the urging member by its rotation tip being hooked on the rotation stopper 365 from the downstream side. The rotation stopper 365 is arranged on the upstream side of the lower plate passage hole 344 and on the opposite side of the lower plate passage partition 342 with the vertical passage 285 interposed therebetween. In this case, since the rotation stopper 365 is disposed at a position higher than the downstream end of the lower dish passage partitioning part 342 in the vertical passage part 285, the rotation stopper 365 is in a flow path of the game ball flowing down the vertical passage part 285. They are located in non-overlapping positions.

  Since the regulating member 363 in the partitioned state is hooked on the rotation stopper 365 from the downstream side, for the purpose of illegally paying out the game balls from the payout device 222, the first ball entrance 34a of the lower plate 34 is used. Even if an illegal jig such as a wire is inserted into the lower door passage portion 273 on the front door side, it is difficult for the illegal jig to push open the regulating member 363 in the fully opened state. Can be suppressed. Thereby, it can be suppressed that the suspicious person receives the payout of the game ball illegally.

  When the regulating member 363 is in the fully opened state, the lower surface of the regulating member 363 is arranged on the extension of the ceiling surface of the third passage portion 353, so that the unauthorized jig contacts the regulating member 363. Even if it is inserted, it is very difficult for the suspicious individual to estimate the position of the boundary between the third passage 353 and the vertical passage 285 from the feel of the jig. That is, it is possible to prevent the suspicious individual from grasping the shape and size of the front door side lower plate passage 273.

  When the game ball does not flow down from the upper horizontal passage portion 284 to the vertical passage portion 285, the regulating member 363 is held in a fully opened state by the urging force of the urging member, while the regulating member 363 is As the game ball flows down the vertical passage portion 285, the game ball shifts to a non-full-open state (closed state or an open state having a smaller opening degree than the fully-opened state) against the urging force of the urging member. When the regulating member 363 is not fully opened, the transmission efficiency of sound from the sound passage 333 to the vertical passage 285 is reduced by the presence of the regulating member 363. For this reason, the volume of the sound emitted toward the lower plate 34 is smaller than when the regulating member 363 is in the fully opened state.

  As shown in FIG. 14, the regulation member 363 is provided with a regulation drive unit 366 forcibly causing the regulation member 363 to perform a closing operation. The regulation drive section 366 is configured to include an electric motor, and has a drive shaft section 366a that is the axis of the motor. The regulation drive section 366 is provided on the front side of the front door side passage unit 45 in a state where the drive shaft section 366a penetrates the front base plate 274a. The base frame 231 of the front door frame 14 is provided with a storage section (not shown) for storing the regulation drive section 366, and the storage section has a concave portion recessed in a direction away from the front door side passage unit 45. Have been.

  The drive shaft portion 366a of the regulation drive portion 366 is provided with a hook portion such as a cam. When the drive shaft portion 366a rotates with the hook portion hooked on the regulation member 363, the regulation member 363 is fully opened. It is possible to shift from the state to the closed state. Here, since the drive shaft portion 366a is not connected to the rotation shaft of the regulating member 363 but the hook portion can be hooked on the regulating member 363, the game is played on the regulating member 363 in the fully opened state. When the ball is placed, only the regulating member 363 will rotate even if the drive shaft 366a of the regulating drive unit 366 does not rotate. In other words, the configuration is not such that the load of the game ball causes the drive shaft 366a to rotate in addition to the regulating member 363. In this case, since the regulating member 363 is easily rotated by a small external force such as a load from the game ball, the regulating member 363 performs the closing operation even when the game ball is placed on the regulating member 363 in the fully opened state. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation of not performing.

<Operation of the regulating member 363>
Next, the operation of the regulating member 363 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 22 and FIG. 23 are views showing an operation mode of the regulating member 363 in the front door side passage unit 45. In FIG. 22, (a) shows a diagram in the case where the regulating member 363 is in the fully opened state, and (b) shows a diagram in which the regulating member 363 performs the closing operation as the game ball flows down. In FIG. 23, (a) shows a diagram when the regulating member 363 is in a closed state, and (b) shows a diagram when a game ball enters the sound passage 333.

  As shown in FIGS. 16 and 22A, in the enclosure 331, when the regulating member 363 is in the fully opened state, the sound output from the rear side of the lower speaker 30a to the air chamber 332 is transmitted to the sound passage 333, The air is discharged toward the lower plate 34 through the vertical passage 285, the lower horizontal passage 286, and the first ball inlet 34a. In this case, the sound reaches the lower plate 34 from the air chamber 332 through the shortest path, and in the enclosure 331, the shortest sound of the sound passage 333, the vertical passage 285, the lower horizontal passage 286, and the first ball inlet 34a. If the portions forming the path are collectively referred to as a horn region 371, the regulating member 363 forms the horn region 371 when in the fully opened state.

  In the enclosure 331, when the regulating member 363 is in the fully opened state, there is a region that is not included in the horn region 371 upstream of the regulating member 363, and that region is referred to as a non-horn region 372. For example, the horn area 371 and the non-horn area 372 are separated by the regulating member 363 in the fully opened state. The non-horn area 372 includes an upper horizontal passage portion 284 and a region of the vertical passage portion 285 upstream of the regulating member 363 in the fully opened state. The regulating member 363 is arranged at the boundary between the horn area 371 and the non-horn area 372 when in the fully opened state (at the partition position).

  When the regulating member 363 is in the closed state, the regulating member 363 partitions the horn region 371 into the sound passage 333 side and the front door side lower plate passage portion 273 side. On the other hand, when the regulating member 363 is in an open state such as a fully opened state, the regulating member 363 does not partition the horn area 371.

  The horn area 371 has a horn shape in which the cross-sectional area is gradually increased from the upstream end of the sound passage 333 toward the downstream end (the lower plate 34) of the first ball inlet 34a. In this case, the cross-sectional area of the upstream end of the vertical passage 285 of the front door-side lower plate passage 273 is equal to or larger than the cross-sectional area of the downstream end (lower plate passage hole 344) of the sound passage 333. Has been enlarged. The cross-sectional area of the upstream end of the first ball inlet 34a is equal to or larger than the cross-sectional area of the downstream end of the lower horizontal passage portion 286.

  In the sound passage 333 and the front door side lower plate passage portion 273, the rate of increase in the cross-sectional area that increases toward the downstream side is made substantially the same, while at the first ball inlet 34a, the downstream side (lower plate) The rate of increase in the cross-sectional area that increases toward 34) is greater than the rates of increase in the cross-sectional areas of the sound passage 333 and the lower door passage 273 on the front door side. In this case, the horn region 371 is bent by the bent portions 304, 305, and 357, but has a morning glory horn as a whole. In the morning glory horn, the sound emitted from the downstream end is difficult to diffuse and easily advances forward, so that the sound emitted from the first ball inlet 34a of the horn area 371 also moves forward of the pachinko machine 10. It will be easier to proceed. For this reason, by utilizing a configuration in which the player easily inserts his / her finger into the first ball entrance 34a, a configuration in which the sound emitted from the first ball entrance 34a is easily heard by the player is realized.

  In addition, in the lower plate 34, since the front region 248 is disposed at a position lower than the lower end of the first ball inlet 34a, the sound emitted from the first ball inlet 34a is blocked by the front region 248. Less likely to occur. For this reason, by utilizing the configuration in which the player easily inserts his hand into the lower plate 34 and grasps the game ball, a configuration in which the sound emitted from the first ball entrance 34a easily reaches the player is realized. are doing.

  The horn area 371 has a back load in the enclosure 331 of the lower speaker unit 30 because the front door side lower plate passage 273 and the sound passage 333 have a plurality of bent portions 304, 305, and 357. It forms a horn. For this reason, in the horn region 371, the sound transmitted from the air chamber 332 to the lower plate 34 is easy to amplify the low range and easily attenuate the middle and high range. Thereby, even if the sound output from the front side of the lower speaker 30a has a low sound volume in the low frequency range, the sound output from the rear side of the lower speaker 30a may cause the shortage of the sound volume in the low frequency range. I can make up for it.

  As shown in FIG. 22B, when the game ball flowing down the front door side lower plate passage 273 reaches the regulation member 363 in the fully opened state, the regulation member 363 is directed downward by the game ball. When the game ball is pushed and closed, the game ball shifts to the non-full-open state, whereby the game ball can pass through the boundary between the horn area 371 and the non-horn area 372. Even if the regulating member 363 does not shift to the closed state, if the opening degree of the regulating member 363 with respect to the lower plate passage hole 344 becomes small enough to allow the game ball to pass through the vertical passage portion 285, the game ball is horned. It can pass through the boundary between the region 371 and the non-horn region 372. The state of the regulating member 363 in this case corresponds to a downflow permission state in which the downflow of the game ball is permitted.

  When the regulating member 363 shifts to the non-full-open state as the game ball passes, the sound output from the lower speaker 30a to the air chamber 332 is blocked by the regulating member 363 in the non-full-open state (lower plate). Since the opening degree of the regulating member 363 with respect to the passage hole 344 is reduced, the transmission from the sound passage 333 to the lower door passage portion 273 on the front door side becomes difficult. For this reason, when the game balls are intermittently paid out from the payout device 222 to the lower plate 34, the emission of the sound to the lower plate 34 is repeatedly regulated by the regulating member 363. The sound emitted from the door-side lower plate passage 273 to the lower plate 34 seems to be repeated momentarily. In this way, by interrupting the sound heard from the lower plate 34, it is possible to suppress the effect of the sound from becoming monotonous, or to make the player aware that the game balls are being discharged to the lower plate 34. Will be possible.

  Incidentally, when a plurality of game balls flow down intermittently in the front door side lower plate passage portion 273, there is a possibility that the next game ball reaches the control member 363 at a timing before the control member 363 returns to the fully opened state. There is. In this case, if the regulating member 363 is not in the fully opened state but is in the open state, the game ball comes into contact with the regulating member 363, and the regulating member 363 is closed again by being pressed by the game ball. Start operation.

  In the front door side lower plate passage portion 273, since the cross-sectional area of the vertical passage portion 285 and the lower horizontal passage portion 286 is sufficiently larger than the game ball, the game ball flowing downstream from the lower plate passage hole 344. Is present, the sound taken in from the lower dish passage hole 344 is transmitted to the downstream side between the game ball and the inner peripheral surface of the front door side passage forming portion 276. Therefore, when a game ball is discharged to the lower plate 34 through the front door side lower plate passage portion 273, it is less likely that the sound emitted from the front door side lower plate passage portion 273 is blocked by the game ball. ing.

  As shown in FIG. 23A, in the front door side passage unit 45, when the lower tray is full by the fullness detection sensor 280, the restricting driving unit 366 is driven to close the restricting member 363. It is supposed to shift to. Here, while the lower plate passage hole 344 is disposed in the vertical passage portion 285, the full detection sensor 280 is disposed in the lower horizontal passage portion 286 downstream of the vertical passage portion 285. Even when the plate 34 is full and the game balls are piled up in the lower horizontal passage portion 286, the regulating member is set before the pile of the game balls reaches the lower plate passage hole 344 in the vertical passage portion 285. 363 can be shifted to the closed state. For this reason, a situation in which the game balls stacked in the vertical passage 285 hinder the transition of the regulating member 363 to the closed state does not easily occur. The operation control of the regulation member 363 (regulation drive unit 366) will be described later.

<Gaming ball discharge function of sound passage 333>
In the horn area 371, as described above, the outflow of the game ball from the front door side lower plate passage portion 273 to the sound passage 333 is regulated by the regulating member 363, but the game ball passes through the outflow regulation and the sound is released. It cannot be said that there is no possibility of flowing out into the passage 333. Therefore, the sound passage 333 is provided with a discharging function of discharging the game balls flowing out to the sound passage 333 toward the front door side lower plate passage portion 273.

  As shown in FIGS. 16 and 23 (a), in the upper horizontal passage portion 284 and the lower horizontal passage portion 286 of the lower door passage portion 273 on the front door side, respective floor surfaces (flow passages) are formed in order to promote the flow of game balls. Road surface) is inclined obliquely downward toward the downstream side.

  In particular, the passage surface 284a of the upper horizontal passage portion 284 is formed by the upper surface of the horizontal portion 342a of the lower plate passage partition portion 342, and the horizontal portion 342a is provided in a state inclined toward the lower plate passage hole 344. It is inclined by having. The lateral portion 342a has its upper surface forming the passage surface 284a, while its lower surface forms the ceiling surface of the third passage portion 353 of the sound passage 333, whereby the ceiling of the third passage portion 353 is formed. The surface and the passage surface 284a of the upper horizontal passage portion 284 extend in parallel.

  Here, in the third passage portion 353, the distance between the ceiling surface and the floor surface (passage surface 353a) is reduced in order to realize a configuration in which the sectional area gradually increases toward the lower plate passage hole 344. It gradually increases toward the dish passage hole 344. As a result, the inclination angle of the passage surface 353a of the third passage portion 353 toward the downstream side of the sound transmission (the lower plate passage hole 344) is set to the upper horizontal direction toward the downstream side (the lower plate passage hole 344) under the flow of the game ball. It is larger than the inclination angle of the passage surface 284 a of the passage portion 284. That is, the inclination angle of the sound passage partitioning portion 355 is larger than the inclination angle of the horizontal portion 342a of the lower plate passage partitioning portion 342.

  Therefore, even if the game ball enters the third passage portion 353 of the sound passage 333, the inclination of the passage surface 353a of the third passage portion 353 promotes the flow of the game ball toward the lower plate passage hole 344. It is. That is, a configuration is realized in which the shape of the third passage portion 353 for forming the horn area 371 is used to promote the discharge of the game ball from the third passage portion 353. Moreover, since the regulating member 363 is normally in the fully opened state, the game ball in the third passage portion 353 may flow down from the lower plate passage hole 344 to the vertical passage portion 285 after reaching the lower plate passage hole 344. In addition, it is hard to be blocked by the regulating member 363. Furthermore, as described above, since the lower plate passage hole 344 extends upward from the sound passage partition 355, the discharge of game balls from the third passage portion 353 causes the vertical portion 342b of the lower plate passage partition 342 to be discharged. There are no restrictions.

<Electrical configuration>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

  A main MPU 402 is mounted on a main control board 401 provided in the main control device 162. The main MPU 402 includes a ROM 403 storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the main MPU 402, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 403. 404, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like. Note that a configuration may be adopted in which some of the functions of the main MPU 402, such as the function of the ROM 403 and the function of the RAM 404, are provided as separate elements.

  The main MPU 402 is provided with an input port and an output port. The input side of the main MPU 402 is connected to a power failure monitoring board 405 provided in the main controller 162, a payout controller 181 and various detection sensors. In this case, the power supply / emission control device 191 is connected to the power failure monitoring board 405, and power is supplied to the main MPU 402 via the power failure monitoring board 405.

  Although not shown, the main MPU 402 includes a prize detection sensor for the general prize port 61, a prize detection sensor for the upper operation port 62, and a prize detection sensor for the lower operation port 63 as a part of various detection sensors. A prize detection sensor for the variable prize device 64 and a prize detection sensor for the through gate 65 are connected, and the main MPU 402 of the main controller 162 determines a prize for each sphere (principle determination). In addition, the main MPU 402 executes a jackpot generation lottery based on winning in the upper operating port 62 and the lower operating port 63, and executes a support generation lottery based on a winning in the through gate 65.

  On the output side of the main MPU 402, a power failure monitoring board 405, a payout control device 181 and a notification / effect control device 143 are connected. For example, a prize ball command is output to the payout control device 181 based on the result of the prize determination for the prize-corresponding winning ball portion. In this case, when the award ball command is output, the command information storage area of the ROM 403 is referred to. When a winning in the general winning opening 61 is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is output, and when a winning in the variable winning device 64 is specified, 15 game balls are specified. The prize ball command corresponding to the payout is output. If the winning in the upper operating port 62 is specified, the prize ball command corresponding to the payout of the three game balls is output. If specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of four game balls is output.

  Various commands such as a change command, a change end command, an opening command, and an ending command are output to the notification and effect control device 143. In this case, when outputting these various commands, the command information storage area of the ROM 403 is referred to. Each of the commands is configured as information of a predetermined number of bytes, and includes various types of information as the information of the predetermined number of bytes. In particular, in the variation command as a command for the game time, in addition to the information on the game result of each game time and the information on the variable display time of each game time, the various types of information include whether to operate the regulation drive unit 366. Information about whether or not it is included.

  Also, on the output side of the main MPU 402, there is an accessory drive unit for driving the electric accessory 71 attached to the lower operating port 63, a variable ball drive unit for driving the opening and closing door of the variable winning device 64, and a main display unit 81. Is connected. The main control board 401 is provided with various driver circuits, and the main MPU 402 executes drive control of various drive units and the like through the driver circuits.

  In other words, in the opening / closing execution mode, the main MPU 402 controls the driving of the variable winning ball drive unit in the variable winning device 64 so that the big winning opening of the variable winning device 64 is opened and closed. In addition, when the lower operating port 63 is in the open state winning (support winning), the drive control of the accessory drive unit of the electric accessory 71 is executed in the main MPU 402 so that the electric accessory 71 is opened and closed. You. Further, at the time of each game, display control of the main display unit 81 is executed in the main MPU 402.

  Further, an external terminal plate 213 is connected to the output side of the main MPU 402. The external terminal board 213 is provided with a jackpot signal output terminal or the like as an output terminal for outputting a signal at the time of state transition. When the game result is a big hit, the main MPU 402 can output a big hit signal to the management control device on the game hall side through a big hit signal output terminal. Specifically, a LOW level signal is output from the jackpot signal output terminal in a normal state, and an HI level signal is output when a jackpot result is obtained. The output form of this signal may be reversed.

  The power failure monitoring board 405 relays between the main control board 401 and the power supply / emission control device 191 and monitors a DC stable 24 volt voltage which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply / emission control device 191.

  The payout control device 181 controls the payout of the prize ball and the loaned ball by the payout device 222 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 162. A fullness detection sensor 280 is connected to the dispensing control device 181, and the dispensing control device 181 can determine whether the lower plate is full by receiving a detection signal from the fullness detection sensor 280. Has become.

  The power supply / emission control device 191 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game arcade or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, the operating power required for each of the main control board 401, the payout control device 181 and the like is generated, and the generated operating power is supplied through a predetermined power path. I do. The power supply / launch control device 191 is responsible for controlling the launch of the game ball launching mechanism 110, and the game ball launching mechanism 110 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are met.

<About various counters>
Next, an electrical configuration for performing various lotteries in the main MPU 402 of the main controller 162 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The main MPU 402 uses the various counter information during the game to perform a jackpot occurrence lottery, set the display of the main display unit 81, set the symbol display of the symbol display device 75, and the like. Specifically, FIG. As shown, a jackpot random number counter C1 used for the lottery of the jackpot occurrence, a jackpot type counter C2 used for determining the jackpot type, and a reach random number counter used for assigning presence / absence of reach and its type. C3, a random number initial value counter CINI used for setting an initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and a fluctuation type counter CS for determining a fluctuation display time in the main display unit 81 and the symbol display device 75 are used. Further, a counter C4 for electric accessory used for a lottery to determine whether or not the electric accessory 71 of the lower operation port 63 is in the electric-operating-open state is used.

  Each of the counters C1 to C4, CINI, and CS is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short time intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 421 set in a predetermined area of the RAM 404. Among them, in the lottery counter buffer 421, information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is acquired in the RAM 404 when a winning is generated in the upper operating port 62 or the lower operating port 63. It is stored in a reserved ball storage area 422 provided as information storage means.

  The reserved ball storage area 422 includes a reserved area RE including a first result display part reserved area Ra and a second result display part reserved area Rb, and an execution area AE. The reservation areas Ra and Rb include a first area Ra1 and Rb1, a second area Ra2 and Rb2, a third area Ra3 and Rb3, and a fourth area Ra4 and Rb4. In accordance with the winning history, each numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the lottery counter buffer 421 is used as the hold information as any of the areas Ra1 to Ra4, Rb1 to Rb4. Is stored in The suspension information corresponds to special information.

  In this case, in the first areas Ra1, Rb1 to the fourth areas Ra4, Rb4, when a winning to the upper operating port 62 or the lower operating port 63 occurs continuously plural times, the first areas Ra1, Rb1 → Numerical information is stored in chronological order in the order of two areas Ra2, Rb2 → third areas Ra3, Rb3 → fourth areas Ra4, Rb4. Since the four areas Ra1 to Ra4 and Rb1 to Rb4 are provided in this manner, up to four winning histories of game balls to the upper operating port 62 or the lower operating port 63 can be held and stored. Has become. Further, the reserved ball storage area 422 is provided with a total reserved number storage area, and the total reserved number storage area specifies the number of prize histories stored in the upper operating port 62 or the lower operating port 63 which are retained. Is stored.

  It should be noted that the number of items that can be held and stored is not limited to four, but may be any number, such as two, three, five or more, or a single number.

  The execution area AE is an area for moving each numerical information stored in the first areas Ra1 and Rb1 of the holding area RE when starting the variable display of the main display unit 81. At this time, a determination as to whether or not a hit is made is made based on various numerical information stored in the execution area AE.

  More specifically, each of the counters is configured such that the jackpot random number counter C1 is incremented by one in the range of, for example, 0 to 599, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The jackpot random number counter C1 is updated periodically, and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 422 of the RAM 404 at the timing when the game ball has won the upper operation port 62 or the lower operation port 63. More specifically, the game result is stored in the first result display section holding area Ra of the RAM 404 at the timing when the game ball wins in the upper operation port 62, and the second result display section of the RAM 404 is displayed at the timing when the game ball wins in the lower operation port 63 at the timing. Is stored in the storage area Rb.

  The value of the random number for winning the jackpot is stored as a hit / fail table (hit / hit information group) in a hit / hit table storage area 411 as a hit / hit information group storage means in the ROM 403. Here, the contents of the success / failure table will be described. As the success / failure table, a success / failure table for a low probability mode (a success / failure information group for low probability) and a success / failure table for a high probability mode (a success / failure information group for high probability) are set. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, a low-probability mode (low-probability state) and a high-probability mode (high-probability state) are set as lottery modes in the winning / rejecting lottery means.

  Under the gaming state in which the winning / rejecting table for the low probability mode is referred to at the time of the above-mentioned lottery, the value of the random number (ie, winning information) for winning the jackpot is two. On the other hand, in the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the high probability mode is referred to at the time of the above-mentioned lottery, there are 21 random number values for the jackpot winning. In this case, the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 that wins the jackpot in the situation of the low probability mode is included in the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 that wins the jackpot in the situation of the high probability mode.

  If the winning probability of the high probability mode is higher than that of the low probability mode, the number and value of the random numbers to be won are arbitrary. The value group of the counter C1 may be a configuration in which only a part is included in the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 that wins the jackpot in the situation of the high probability mode, or may not be included.

  In each lottery mode, the result of the lottery is a result other than the value of the random number that is a big hit.

  Next, the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by one in order within the range of 0 to 29, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is updated periodically, and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 422 of the RAM 404 at the timing when the game ball has won the upper working port 62 or the lower working port 63. More specifically, the game result is stored in the first result display section holding area Ra of the RAM 404 at the timing when the game ball wins in the upper operation port 62, and the second result display section of the RAM 404 is displayed at the timing when the game ball wins in the lower operation port 63 at the timing. Is stored in the storage area Rb.

  Here, in the pachinko machine 10, (1) a success / failure lottery mode in the success / failure lottery means after the completion of the opening / closing execution mode, and (2) a support mode of the lower operating port 63 in the electric accessory 71 after the completion of the opening / closing execution mode. By providing a difference between the two conditions, a plurality of types of jackpot results are set. The low probability mode and the high probability mode are set as the success / failure lottery mode as described above.

  As the support mode, the frequency at which the electric accessory 71 of the lower working port 63 becomes the receiving state per unit time when compared in a situation where the launch of the game ball is continued in the same manner with respect to the game area PE. The low frequency support mode (the low frequency support state or the low frequency guide state) and the high frequency support mode (the high frequency support state or the high frequency guide state) are set such that is relatively high and low.

  Specifically, in the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning in the electric winning state in the lottery for the electric accessory using the electric accessory counter C4 is the same (for example, both are 4/5). However, in the high-frequency support mode, the number of times the electric accessory 71 enters the receiving state when the election is accepted is set higher than in the low-frequency support mode. The time is set long. In this case, in the high-frequency support mode, in the case where the electric winning reception state is won and the receiving state of the electric accessory 71 occurs a plurality of times, the waiting from the end of one receiving state to the start of the next receiving state. The time is set shorter than one receiving time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the minimum securing time set after the one draw for the electric accessory is performed and then the next lottery for the electric accessory is set, as compared with the low-frequency support mode. Have been.

  As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability that a prize will occur in the lower operation port 63 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning of the upper working port 62 is higher than that of the lower working port 63, but in the high frequency support mode, the winning of the lower working port 63 is higher than that of the upper working port 62. Is more likely to occur. When a prize is generated in the lower operating port 63, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. In the high-frequency support mode, the player plays a game while not reducing the number of balls held. be able to.

  Note that the configuration for increasing the frequency of receiving the electric utility per unit time in the high-frequency support mode more than the low-frequency support mode is not limited to the above-described configuration. It is good also as a structure which makes the probability of winning the electrification state in a high. Further, the number of times of switching to the receiving state is increased, the receiving time is lengthened, and a minimum is secured after one electric lottery lottery is performed after one electric lottery lottery is performed. By shortening the time (that is, shortening the one-time fluctuation display time in the result display section for the accessory) and increasing the winning probability, one of the conditions or an arbitrary combination of conditions is applied to reduce the time. The advantage of the frequent support mode over the frequent support mode may be enhanced.

  The distribution destination of the game result with respect to the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table (distribution information group) in a distribution table storage area 412 as a distribution information group storage means in the ROM 403. Then, as the distribution destination, a normal jackpot result (low-probability-compatible special game result) and a probable-change jackpot result (high-probability-specific special game result) are set.

  The normal jackpot result is that after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the winning / rejecting lottery mode becomes the low probability mode, and after the support mode shifts, the high frequency support is performed until the number of games reaches the end reference number (specifically, 100 times). It is a jackpot result that becomes a mode. After the end reference number has elapsed, the mode is shifted to the low frequency support mode.

  The probability change jackpot result is a jackpot result in which after the end of the opening / closing execution mode, the win / fail lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode. The high-frequency support mode is continued until the lottery result in the winning / failing lottery becomes a jackpot state win and the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode.

  In the distribution table, “0 to 9” generally corresponds to the jackpot result, and “10 to 29” corresponds to the probable variable jackpot result, but the distribution of this numerical value is arbitrary. The distribution destination of the jackpot result is not limited to the above two types. For example, in the open / close execution mode, a plurality of modes are set so that the expected value of the game ball becomes high or low, and the open / close execution is performed. The type of the jackpot result may be increased from the above two types by providing a difference in the mode to which the mode is shifted.

  The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be added one by one in order within a range of, for example, 0 to 238, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Here, in the pachinko machine 10, an expected effect is set as a type of display effect on the symbol display device 75. The expected effect means that in the gaming machine in which the variable prize device 64 is in the opening / closing execution mode, in the gaming machine in which the stop result after the variable display is the provisional result, the variable display of the symbol (picture) on the symbol display device 75 is started. In the stage before the stop result is derived and displayed from, the display state is to make the player think that the change display state is likely to be the above-mentioned provision result.

  Two types of expected effects are set: a reach display and a notice display for expecting the occurrence of the reach display and the generation of the assignment correspondence result at a stage prior to the occurrence of the reach display.

  In the reach display, a combination of reach symbols is displayed by stopping and displaying symbols in some of the symbol columns among a plurality of symbol columns displayed on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75, and displaying the remaining combinations in that state. A display state in which a symbol is fluctuated in the symbol row is included. In addition, in the state where the combination of the reach symbols is displayed as described above, while performing the variation display of the symbols in the remaining symbol columns, and performing a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on the background screen, , A combination of reach symbols is reduced or displayed, and a reach effect is displayed by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display screen.

  In the notice display, a state in which the symbols are variably displayed on all the symbol columns after the symbol variable display is started on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75, or a plurality of symbols in some symbol columns. In a situation in which symbols are variably displayed in the symbol row, a mode in which a character is displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol row is included. Further, the background screen may have a predetermined mode different from the previous mode, and the symbol on the symbol row may have a predetermined mode different from the previous mode. Such a notice display may occur in any of the game times when the reach display is performed and when the reach display is not performed, but the display when the reach display is performed is higher than that when the reach display is not performed. It is set to occur with probability.

  The reach display is executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the game that shifts to the open / close execution mode. Also, in the game times in which the mode does not shift to the open / close execution mode, the reach random number counter C3 acquired at a predetermined timing with reference to the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 403 responds to the occurrence of the reach display. Will be executed if On the other hand, the determination as to whether or not to display the advance notice is made not by the main control device 162 but by the notification / effect control device 143 or the display control device 170.

  The fluctuation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by one in order within a range of, for example, 0 to 198, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS is used when the main MPU 402 determines the variation display time in the main display unit 81 and the symbol variation display time in the symbol display device 75. The fluctuation type counter CS is updated once each time a normal process described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal process. The buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired at the time of starting the variation display on the main display unit 81 and at the time of determining the variation pattern by the symbol display device 75 at the start of the symbol variation.

  The electric accessory counter C4 is configured to be incremented by 1, for example, in the range of 0 to 249, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory counter C4 is updated periodically, and is stored in the electric utility holding area 423 of the RAM 404 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 65. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed to determine whether to control the electric accessory 71 of the lower working port 63 to the receiving state based on the stored value of the electric accessory counter C4. For example, if C3 = 0 to 199, the electric accessory 71 is controlled to the receiving state, and if C3 = 200 to 249, the electric accessory 71 is not controlled to the receiving state.

  As described above, the main MPU 402 determines the variable display time in the main display unit 81 using at least the buffer value of the variable type counter CS, and uses the variable display time table storage area of the ROM 403 for the determination. Can be The main MPU 402 determines the stop result in the main display unit 81 by using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE. The stop result table storage area is used.

<Electrical configuration of the notification / production control device 143 and the display control device 170>
Referring again to the block diagram of FIG. 24, the electrical configuration of the notification / effect control device 143 and the display control device 170 will be described.

  The notification / production control device 143 controls the lamp units 26 to 28 and the speakers 29a and 30a provided on the front door frame 14 based on various commands input from the main control device 162.

  The notification / production control device 143 has a notification / production control board 431 on which a sub MPU 432 is mounted. The sub MPU 432 has a ROM 433 storing various control programs and fixed value data, and a control program stored in the ROM 433. A RAM 434, which is a memory for temporarily storing various data at the time of execution, is built in. The ROM 433 stores sound data for outputting effect sounds, notification sounds, and guidance sounds from the speakers 29 and 30. The sound data is digital data, which is waveform data obtained by sampling actual audible sound and analog data.

  The sub-MPU 432 is provided with an input port and an output port. The main controller 162 is connected to the input side of the sub-MPU 432 and receives various commands from the main controller 162. On the output side of the sub-MPU 432, various lamp units 26 to 28 and speakers 29a and 30a provided on the front door frame 14 are connected, and a display control device 170 is connected.

  Further, the output side of the sub-MPU 432 is connected to the regulation drive section 366 of the front door side passage unit 45, and the sub-MPU 432 controls the drive of the regulation drive section 366 based on various commands from the main control device 162. I do. Here, the sub-MPU 432 drives the regulation driving unit 366 to forcibly close the regulation member 363, so that the sound output from the rear side of the lower speaker 30a is not easily emitted to the front of the pachinko machine 10. It becomes possible. For this reason, the sub-MPU 432 controls the driving of the regulation drive unit 366, thereby performing output control on the sound output to the lower plate 34.

  The display control device 170 includes a display control board 441 on which an MPU 442 is mounted. The MPU 442 includes a program ROM storing various control programs and fixed value data, and a control ROM stored in the program ROM. A work RAM, which is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the program, is incorporated.

  A symbol display device 75 is connected to the display control board 441. The MPU 442 of the display control device 170 controls the display of the symbol display device 75 based on the command input from the notification / effect control device 143. The display control device 170 determines the variable display time of the symbol in the symbol display device 75 and the type of the combination of symbols to be finally stopped and displayed on the basis of various commands input from the main control device 162, Determine the occurrence and content of the reach production.

<Regarding Various Processes Executed by Main MPU 402>
Next, each process executed to advance the game in the main MPU 402 of the main control device 162 will be described. The processing of the main MPU 402 is roughly classified into a main processing started upon power-on and a timer interrupt processing started periodically.

<Main processing>
First, the main processing will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  First, in step S101, a power-on wait process is executed. In the power-on wait process, for example, the process waits until one second elapses after the main process is started without proceeding to the next process. In the following step S102, access to the RAM 404 is permitted, and in step S103, an internal function register of the main MPU 402 is set.

  Then, in a step S104, it is determined whether or not the RWM erasure switch provided in the power / fire control device 191 is manually operated. In a succeeding step S105, it is determined whether or not the power failure flag of the RAM 404 is set to “1”. Is determined. In step S106, a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum is performed. In step S107, it is determined whether the checksum matches the checksum stored when the power is turned off, that is, the validity of the stored data is determined. judge.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the RWM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the game hall is opened, the power is turned on while pressing the RWM erase switch. Therefore, if the RWM erasure switch has been pressed, the process proceeds to step S108. Also, when the power shutdown occurrence information is not set, or when the stored data is confirmed to be abnormal by the checksum, the process similarly shifts to step S108. In step S108, the RAM 404 is cleared as initialization of the RAM 404. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S109.

  On the other hand, if the RWM erasure switch has not been pressed, step S109 is performed without executing step S108 on condition that the power failure flag is set to “1” and that the checksum is normal. Proceed to. In step S109, a power-on setting process is executed. In the power-on setting process, a predetermined area of the RAM 404 such as initialization of a power failure flag is set to an initial value, and a command corresponding to the current game state is sent to the notification / production control device 143 in order to recognize the current game state. Send. In addition, the payout control device 181 transmits to the payout control device 181 a payout initialization command indicating that the RWM should be initialized. Further, an interrupt permission setting is performed to permit the occurrence of the timer interrupt processing.

  Thereafter, the process proceeds to the remaining process of steps S110 to S113. That is, the main MPU 402 is configured to periodically execute the timer interrupt process, but a remaining time is generated between one timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process. The remaining time varies according to the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, but the remaining process of steps S110 to S113 is repeatedly executed using the irregular time. In this regard, it can be said that the remaining processes in steps S110 to S113 are irregular processes that are executed irregularly.

  In the remaining process, first, in step S110, interrupt prohibition is set to prohibit occurrence of the timer interrupt process. In the following step S111, a random number initial value updating process for updating the random number initial value counter CINI is executed, and in step S112, a variation counter updating process for updating the variation type counter CS is executed. In these updating processes, the current numerical information is read from the corresponding counter of the RAM 404, a process of adding 1 to the read numerical information is performed, and then a process of overwriting the read counter is performed. In this case, when the counter value reaches the maximum value, each is cleared to “0”. Thereafter, in step S113, an interrupt permission setting for switching from a state in which the generation of the timer interrupt processing is prohibited to a state in which the timer interrupt processing is permitted is performed. After executing the process of step S113, the process returns to step S110, and the processes of steps S110 to S113 are repeated.

<Timer interrupt processing>
Next, the timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  Here, a hardware configuration for periodically executing the timer interrupt process in the main MPU 402 will be described. The main control board 401 is provided with a clock circuit as a pulse signal output means for outputting a pulse signal at a predetermined period, and further divides the frequency so that the clock signal is located at an intermediate position in a signal path between the clock circuit and the main MPU 402. A circuit is provided.

  The frequency dividing circuit functions as frequency changing means for changing the cycle of the pulse signal from the clock circuit, and is configured to output a pulse signal for specifying the start timing of the timer interrupt processing by the main MPU 402. That is, a pulse signal is supplied from the frequency dividing circuit to the main MPU 402 at intervals of a specific period of 4 msec. The main MPU 402 executes a process of confirming the occurrence of a specific signal form such as the rising or falling of the pulse signal, and starts a timer interrupt process under the condition that the occurrence of the specific signal form has been confirmed at least as one condition. Execute.

  In this case, if the occurrence of the above specific signal form is confirmed in a situation where the activation of the timer interrupt processing is prohibited, the timer is changed from a state where the interrupt is prohibited to a state where the interrupt is permitted. Interrupt processing is started. In other words, depending on the execution status of the process in the main MPU 402, the next timer interrupt process may be started 4.1 msec after the previous timer interrupt process was started. Is started 3.9 msec after the immediately preceding timer interrupt process is started.

  However, the output of the pulse signal from the frequency dividing circuit is performed at a specific cycle such as 4 msec regardless of the progress of the processing in the main MPU 402. Therefore, the timer interrupt processing is basically started at a specific cycle. Furthermore, the processing configuration of the main MPU 402 is such that even if the timer interrupt processing at a predetermined timing is started after a period exceeding a specific period has elapsed since the previous timer interrupt processing was started, the next time after the predetermined timing The timer interrupt processing at the timing absorbs the amount exceeding the specific period, and the timer interrupt processing at the next timing is set to be started at the timing when the input of the pulse signal is confirmed.

  In the timer interruption process, first, a power failure information storage process is executed in step S201. In the power failure information storage processing, it is monitored whether or not a power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of power interruption has been received from the power failure monitoring board 405, and if a power failure has been identified, a power failure processing is executed.

  In a succeeding step S202, a random number updating process for lottery is executed. In the random number update process for lottery, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory opening counter C4 are updated. Specifically, after performing the processing of sequentially reading the current numerical information from the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory opening counter C4, and adding one to each of the read numerical information, Then, a process of overwriting the counter of the read source is executed. In this case, when the counter value reaches the maximum value, each is cleared to “0”.

  Thereafter, in step S203, a random number initial value updating process is executed as in step S111, and in step S204, a fluctuation counter updating process is executed as in step S112. In a succeeding step S205, a game stop determination process is executed. In the game stop determination process, it is monitored whether or not the progress of the game is to be stopped, and if the progress of the game is to be stopped, the execution of the process for progressing the game is stopped.

  After that, in step S206, it is determined whether or not the progress of the game is stopped, and the process from step S207 is executed on condition that the progress of the game is not stopped.

  In step S207, a port output process is performed. In the port output process, when the output information is set in the previous timer interrupt process, a process for outputting an output corresponding to the output information to the variable winning device 64 and the electric accessory 71 is executed. For example, when the information for switching the large winning opening of the variable winning device 64 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the variable winning device 64 is started, and the information for switching to the closed state is set. In this case, the output of the drive signal is stopped. When the information to switch the electric accessory 71 of the lower working port 63 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the electric accessory 71 is started, and the information to switch to the closed state is set. If so, the output of the drive signal is stopped.

  In a succeeding step S208, a reading process is executed. In the reading processing, signals other than the power failure signal and the winning signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processing.

  In a succeeding step S209, a winning detection process is executed. In the prize detection process, the signal received from each prize detection sensor such as the general prize port 61 is read, and the general prize port 61, the large prize port of the variable prize device 64, the upper operation port 62, the lower operation port 63, and A process for specifying whether or not a winning has been made to the through gate 65 is executed.

  In the following step S210, a timer update process for updating numerical information of a plurality of types of timer counters provided in the RAM 404 is executed. In this case, the timer counter, which is updated by subtracting the stored numerical information, is collectively handled. However, both the updating of the subtracting timer counter and the updating of the adding timer counter are collectively performed. It may be configured.

  In the following step S211, a fraud detection process of monitoring whether or not a predetermined event set as a fraud monitoring target has occurred is executed. In the fraud detection process, the occurrence of a plurality of types of events is monitored, and by confirming that a predetermined event has occurred, the setting for stopping the game is performed in step S205 in the next timer interrupt process, An affirmative determination is made in step S206.

  In a succeeding step S212, a launch control process for performing launch control of the game ball is executed. In the situation where the firing operation is continued on the game ball firing handle 41, as described above, one game ball is fired in a predetermined firing cycle of 0.6 sec.

  In the following step S213, as an input state monitoring process, disconnection of each winning detection sensor and opening confirmation of the gaming machine main unit 12 and the front door frame 14 are performed based on the information read in the reading process in step S208.

  In the following step S214, a special figure special power control process for performing the execution control of the game times and the execution control of the opening / closing execution mode is executed. In the special figure special power control process, when a prize is generated in the upper operating port 62 or the lower operating port 63 in a situation where the number of pending information stored in the reserved sphere storage area 422 is less than the upper limit number, at that time, , A process of storing the numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 in the reserved ball storage area 422 in time series as the reserved information. Also, in the special figure special power control process, on the condition that the game is not in the game turn or in the open / close execution mode and the hold information is stored, it is determined whether the hold information corresponds to the jackpot winning or not. If the process corresponds to the jackpot winning, a sorting determination process for determining which jackpot result the suspension information corresponds to is executed. In addition, in the special figure special power control processing, in addition to the hit / fail judgment processing and the distribution judgment processing, when the hold information does not correspond to the jackpot winning, it is determined whether the hold information corresponds to the occurrence of the reach. In addition to executing the reach determination processing for determination, the control section also performs the duration selection processing for selecting the duration of the game times using the numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS at that time. Then, a variation command including information on the duration according to the result of each of the processes and a type command including information on the game result are transmitted to the notification / production control device 143, and the pattern of the pattern in the main display unit 81 is displayed. Start the variable display. Thereby, one game round is started, and the effect for the game round is started in the main display unit 81 and the symbol display device 75.

  Also, in the special figure special power control process, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the game round during execution of one game round, and if it is the end timing, the display corresponding to the game result is performed. Then, a process for ending the game round is executed. In this case, a final stop command (or a determination command) indicating that the game round should be ended is transmitted to the notification and effect control device 143. Further, in the special figure special power control process, if the result of the game times is a result corresponding to the shift to the opening and closing execution mode, a process for starting the opening and closing execution mode is executed. At the time of this start, an opening command indicating that the opening / closing execution mode is started is transmitted to the notification and effect control device 143. In the special figure special power control process, a process for starting each round game and a process for ending each round game are executed. In each of these processes, an opening command indicating that the round game is started (or that the variable winning device 64 is opened) is transmitted to the notification / production control device 143, and the round game is ended (or A closing command indicating that the variable winning device 64 will be in the closed state) is transmitted to the notification and effect control device 143. In addition, in the special figure special power control process, when the opening / closing execution mode is ended, an ending command indicating the end is transmitted to the notification / effect control device 143, and the success / failure lottery mode and the support mode after the opening / closing execution mode are set. Execute the processing of

  After executing the special figure special power control processing of step S214 in the timer interrupt processing, the general figure general power control processing is executed in step S215. In the general-purpose general-purpose control process, a process for acquiring general-purpose side hold information is performed when a prize to the through gate 65 is generated, and when general-purpose side hold information is stored. Then, a release determination is made for the hold information, and a process for performing an effect for ordinary drawing is executed with the release determination as an opportunity. In addition, a process of opening and closing the electric accessory 71 of the lower working port 63 is executed based on the result of the opening determination.

  In the following step S216, based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps S214 and S215, the output information for reflecting the increase / decrease number of the hold information related to the main display unit 81 in the hold number display section is set, and the main display is set. The output information for reflecting the increase / decrease number of the hold information related to the unit 81 on the hold number display section is set. In step S216, output information for updating the display content of the main display unit 81 is set based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps S214 and S215, and the display content of the main display unit 81 is updated. To set output information for

  In a succeeding step S217, a demo display process for changing the display content of the symbol display device 75 to a standby display in a situation where neither the game round nor the opening / closing execution mode is executed is executed, and in a step S218, Then, the contents of the command and the signal received from the payout control device 181 are confirmed, and a payout state receiving process for performing a process corresponding to the confirmation result is executed. In step S219, a payout output process for setting the prize ball command as an output target is executed.

  In the following step S220, an external information setting process for controlling the start and end of the output of the external signal according to the processing result of the various processes executed in the current timer interrupt process is executed. In step S221, a process for editing the trial test information is executed.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S206, or after executing the processing in steps S207 to S221, the process proceeds to step S222. In step S222, an interrupt end declaration is set. The main MPU 402 stipulates that, once the timer interrupt processing has been started, one of the conditions for starting the next timer interrupt processing is to set an interrupt end declaration. In step S222, the following is set. Set the interrupt end declaration to enable execution of timer interrupt processing. In step S223, interruption permission is set. In the main MPU 402, once the timer interrupt processing is started, the state is set to the interrupt disabled state. Therefore, in step S223, the interrupt permission is set to enable the execution of the next timer interrupt processing. Thereafter, the timer interrupt processing ends.

<Tokuzu Tokuden control processing>
Next, the special figure special power control processing executed in step S214 of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 27) will be described.

  In the special figure special power control process, when a winning is generated in the upper operating port 62 or the lower operating port 63, a process for acquiring the holding information is executed, and when the holding information is stored, the holding is performed. A determination is made as to whether or not the information is appropriate, and a process for performing an effect for playing a game is executed with the determination as to whether the determination is appropriate. In addition, based on the result of the hit / fail determination, a process of shifting to the open / close execution mode after the effect for the game round is executed, and a process during the open / close execution mode and at the end of the open / close execution mode is executed.

  As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 28, first, in step S601, a process of acquiring suspension information is executed. In the process of acquiring the hold information, it is determined whether or not a winning has occurred in the upper operating port 62 or the lower operating port 63. If a winning has occurred, the number of holds in the holding ball storage area 422 is set to the upper limit. It is determined whether it is less than (“4” in the present embodiment). If the number of reservations is less than the upper limit, the number of reservations is incremented by one, and at the same time, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in the previous step S202 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 27). Are stored in the first reserved area among the empty reserved areas Ra1 to Ra4, Rb1 to Rb4 of the reserved area RE.

  In addition, when winning in the upper operating port 62 and the lower operating port 63 occurs simultaneously, the processing for acquiring the suspension information is performed a plurality of times within a range in which the acquisition processing of the suspension information is performed once. Execute.

  After executing the process of acquiring the hold information in step S301, the process proceeds to steps S302 and S303. In step S302 and step S303, a confirmation process for a reservation notice, which is a process for causing the notification / production control device 143 and the display control device 170 to recognize that a winning has occurred in the upper operating port 62 or the lower operating port 63, and Execute the pending command setting process.

  The hold command set in the hold command setting process in step S303 is transmitted to the notification and effect control device 143. A detailed description of each processing of steps S302 and S303 will be described later.

  In the subsequent step S304, a process of reading information of the special figure special power counter provided in the RAM 404 is executed, and in step S305, a process of reading the special figure special power address table from the RPM 403 is executed. Then, in step S306, a process of acquiring a start address corresponding to the information of the special figure special power counter from the special figure special power address table is executed.

  Here, the processing contents of steps S304 to S306 will be described.

  As described above, the special figure special power control process includes a process related to the effect for the game round and a process related to the open / close execution mode. In this case, as a process related to the effect for the game round, a special figure variation start process (step S308), which is a process for starting an effect for the game round, and a process for advancing the effect for the game round. A certain special figure changing process (step S309) and a special figure finalizing process (step S310), which is a process for terminating the game effect, are set.

  Further, as processing relating to the opening / closing execution mode, a special power starting process (step S311) for controlling the opening of the opening / closing execution mode, and a state for controlling the open state of the big winning opening of the variable winning device 64. Special power closing processing (step S312) as processing, special power closing processing (step S313) for controlling the state of the special winning opening being closed, and the ending of the open / close execution mode and the end of the open / close execution mode And a special power ending process (step S314), which is a process for controlling the transition of the game state.

  In such a processing configuration, the special figure special power counter is a counter for the main MPU 402 to know which of the plurality of types of processing is to be executed. A start address of a program for executing the above-described plurality of types of processing is set in correspondence with the numerical information of the figure special power counter.

  In this case, the start address SA0 is a start address of a program for executing the special figure change start processing (step S308), and the start address SA1 is a program address for executing the special figure change processing (step S309). The start address SA2 is a start address of a program for executing the special figure determination process (step S310), and the start address SA3 is a program address for executing the special power start process (step S311). The start address SA4 is a start address of the program for executing the special power closing process (step S312), and the start address SA5 is the program for executing the special power closing process (step S313). The start address SA6 is the start address of the special power ending process. A start address of a program for executing (step S314).

  The special figure special power counter starts the special figure special power control in the next processing cycle when the condition for updating the numerical information is satisfied when the processing corresponding to the currently stored numerical information is completed. One is added, one is subtracted, or "0" is cleared (initialized) in correspondence with the processing executed in the processing. Therefore, in the special figure special power control processing in each processing cycle, it is sufficient to execute a process according to the numerical information set in the special figure special power counter.

  After executing the process of step S306, in step S307, a process of jumping to the process indicated by the start address acquired in step S306 is executed. Specifically, if the acquired start address is SA0, the process jumps to the special figure change start process in step S308.

  In the special figure change start process, on the condition that the hold information is stored on the hold, the process of shifting the hold information to the execution area AE of the hold ball storage area 422 is executed, and each of the hold areas Ra1 to Ra4, Rb1 is executed. Rb4 is shifted to the upper side (that is, to the first areas Ra1 and Rb1). Thereafter, for the hold information shifted to the execution area AE, a win / fail determination process for determining whether or not the jackpot is won, and if the hold information corresponds to the jackpot win, the hold information corresponds to any of the jackpot results. A distribution determination process is performed to determine whether the process is performed. In the success / failure determination process, it is determined whether or not the numerical information obtained from the jackpot random number counter C1 in the hold information is the numerical information corresponding to the jackpot winning. In the distribution determination process, it is determined whether the numerical information acquired from the jackpot type counter C2 in the hold information corresponds to any of the jackpot result categories.

  When the hold information does not correspond to the jackpot winning as well as the hit / fail determination processing and the distribution determination processing, the reach determination processing is performed to determine whether the hold information corresponds to the occurrence of the reach. Then, using the numerical information of the variation type counter CS at that time, a duration selection process for selecting the duration of the game times is executed. In the reach determination process, it is determined whether the numerical information obtained from the reach random number counter C3 in the hold information corresponds to the numerical information on the occurrence of the reach.

  When the information on the duration is selected, the variation command including the information on the duration and the type command including the information on the game result are transmitted to the notification / production control device 143, and the pattern display on the main display unit 81 is performed. Start the variable display. Thereby, one game round is started, and the effect for the game round is started in the main display unit 81 and the symbol display device 75.

  By the way, when the effect for the game round is started in this way, by adding 1 to the numerical information of the special figure special power counter, the numerical information of the counter is changed from the one corresponding to the special figure change start processing to the special figure change start processing. Update to the one corresponding to the processing during fluctuation.

  If the acquired start address is SA1, the process jumps to the special figure changing process in step S309. In the special figure changing process, a process of determining whether or not the timing is before the final display is performed during the continuation time of the game, and the display mode of the pattern on the main display unit 81 if it is before the final display. Is executed to regularly change.

  By the way, instead of waiting in the special figure changing process until the final display timing is reached, if it is not the final display timing, the above-described process for regularly changing is executed. The process ends. Therefore, after the effect for the game round is started, the special figure changing process is activated each time the special figure special power control process is activated until the timing for confirming the display is reached. In addition, when the timing for confirming the display is reached, the numerical information of the special figure special power counter is incremented by one to change the numerical information of the counter from the processing corresponding to the special figure changing processing to the special figure fixing processing. Update to what you have done.

  If the acquired start address is SA2, the process jumps to the special figure fixing process in step S310. In the special figure finalizing process, a final stop command is transmitted to the notification and effect control device 143 in order to cause the symbol display device 75 to display the result of stopping the current game round as a final stop, and the symbol display in the main display unit 81 is performed. The display mode is set to a display mode corresponding to the lottery result of the current game. Further, in the special figure finalizing process, it is determined whether or not the period during which the final display is being performed has elapsed, and if the period has elapsed, it is determined whether or not a shift to the open / close execution mode occurs. When the shift to the open / close execution mode occurs, the process for the mode shift is executed.

  Incidentally, instead of waiting in the special figure fixing process until the fixed display period elapses, the special figure fixing process ends if the period has not elapsed. Therefore, after the fixed display is started, until the period during the fixed display has elapsed, the special figure special processing is started each time the special figure special power control processing is started. Further, when the period during the fixed display has elapsed, in a situation where the shift to the opening / closing execution mode does not occur, the numerical information of the special figure special power counter is initialized (ie, “0” is cleared), and the shift to the opening / closing execution mode is performed. Is generated, the numerical information of the special figure special power counter is incremented by one to update the numerical information of the counter from the one corresponding to the special figure fixing process to the one corresponding to the special power start process.

  If the acquired start address is SA3, the process jumps to the special power starting process in step S311. In the special power starting process, an opening command indicating that the opening / closing execution mode is started is transmitted to the notification and effect control device 143. In the special power starting process, it is determined whether or not the opening and closing execution mode opening period has elapsed. If the opening period has not elapsed, the special power start process is terminated instead of waiting in the special power start process. Therefore, after the opening effect of the opening / closing execution mode is started, the special electric power start processing is activated every time the special figure special electric power control processing is activated until the opening period elapses. When the opening period has elapsed, the numerical information of the special figure special power counter is incremented by 1, thereby updating the numerical information of the counter from the one corresponding to the special power start processing to the one corresponding to the special power open processing. .

  If the acquired start address is SA4, the process jumps to the special power releasing process in step S312. In the special power opening process, one round game is started, and it is determined whether or not the end condition of the round game is satisfied. If the end condition is not satisfied, the present special power opening process is terminated after executing a process for monitoring the satisfaction of the end condition instead of waiting in the special power opening process. If the above termination condition is satisfied, the numerical information of the special figure special power counter is incremented by 1 to change the numerical information of the counter from the one corresponding to the special power open processing to the one corresponding to the special power closed processing. Update.

  If the acquired start address is SA5, the process jumps to the special power closing process in step S313. In the special power closing process, a process of ending one round game is executed. In the interval period between round games, it is determined whether or not the interval period has elapsed. If the interval period has not elapsed, this special power closing process is terminated instead of waiting in the special power closing process. Therefore, when the interval period is started, the special power closing process is activated each time the special figure special power control process is activated until the period elapses. When the interval period has elapsed, the numerical information of the special figure special power counter is decremented by 1, thereby updating the numerical information of the counter from the one corresponding to the special power closing processing to the one corresponding to the special power opening processing. I do.

  On the other hand, in the special power closing process for the last round game, after performing the process of ending one round game, the numerical information of the special figure special power counter is incremented by one, so that the numerical information of the counter is changed to the special power closing process. Update from the corresponding one to the one corresponding to the special power termination process.

  If the acquired start address is SA6, the process jumps to the special power ending process in step S314. In the special power ending process, an ending command indicating that the open / close execution mode is ended is transmitted to the notification / effect control device 143. In the special power ending process, it is determined whether the ending period of the open / close execution mode has elapsed. If the ending period has not elapsed, the present special power ending process is terminated instead of waiting in the special power ending process. Therefore, after the ending effect in the open / close execution mode is started, until the ending period elapses, each time the special figure special power control process is activated, the special power ending process is activated. Further, when the ending period has elapsed, by executing a process for setting a game state after the opening / closing execution mode (win / fail lottery mode and support mode), the numerical information of the special figure special power counter is initialized. Then, the numerical information of the counter is updated from information corresponding to the special power ending process to information corresponding to the special figure change start process.

  Next, a variation display mode of a symbol displayed on the symbol display device 75 (display screen 75a) as an effect for the game round will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29A is a schematic diagram showing types of variable display modes, and FIG. 29B is a schematic diagram showing an outline of each variable display mode.

  As shown in FIG. 29 (a), the symbol variation display mode executed on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75 is completely off, normal reach A, normal reach B, super reach A, super reach B, super reach. C is roughly divided into five. For each of these variable display modes, the variable display time is set to be different, and the outline of the variable display mode for each game is grasped based on information given to the command from the main control device 162 and relating to the variable display time. It is possible.

  More specifically, "3 sec to 8 sec" (a difference is set according to the number of holdings) for the completely out-of-range fluctuation display time, "10 sec" for the fluctuation display time of the normal reach A, and the fluctuation display time of the normal reach B "15 sec" longer than the fluctuation display time of normal reach A, "16 sec" longer than the fluctuation display time of normal reach A and B for super reach A, and super reach for the fluctuation display time of super reach B The variable display time of A is "17 sec" longer than the variable display time, and the variable display time of Super Reach C is "18 sec" longer than the variable display time of the other super reach A and B. As the variable display time becomes longer, It is set to increase the expectation of winning the jackpot. For example, when the information about the variable display time given to the command from the main control device 162 is “15 sec”, the display control device 170 knows that the normal reach B should be executed.

  Here, the fluctuation display mode of the normal reach A and B will be described with reference to FIG. When the normal reach A or B is selected, first, the variable display (scroll display) of all the symbol columns that are stopped and displayed is started, and then the symbol variable display in the upper symbol column Z1 is ended (stop). Display), and the variable display of the symbols in the lower symbol row Z3 is terminated (stop display). In the state where the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3 are stopped and displayed in this way, a reach symbol is formed by stopping and displaying a main symbol having the same number attached to any of the activated lines. Then, the reach display is performed by performing the variable display of the middle symbol row Z2 in a state where the reach line is formed. After the reach display, the symbol display Z2 in the middle row is stopped and displayed, and the variable display ends. Then, when the same symbol as the symbol constituting the reach display stops on the reach line, it is notified that the jackpot has been won, and when the other symbols stop on the reach line, the jackpot is won. It will be notified that it has not done so. In this way, the combination of the symbols finally stopped and displayed is maintained for a predetermined period. That is, the current game time continues until the stop display period elapses, and the transition to the next game time is allowed by the elapse of the stop display period.

  In the present embodiment, the difference in the variable display time between the normal reach A and the normal reach B is secured by setting a difference in the variable display time of the middle symbol row Z2 after the reach line is formed. The method of setting the difference is arbitrary. For example, by setting a difference in the time from the start of the variable display to the formation of the reach line, the difference in the variable display time can be ensured.

  Next, the variable display mode of the super reach A, B, C will be described based on the variable display mode of the normal reach A, B described above. As shown in FIGS. 29 (b2) to (b4), the above-described reach lines are formed for super reach A, B, and C through the same process as normal reach A and B. Then, after the reach line is formed, a reach effect is performed by displaying a predetermined character as a moving image together with the fluctuation display of the middle symbol row Z2. Specifically, after the reach line is formed in the super reach A, a character imitating a fairy is displayed at the center of the variable display area (the center of the variable display area ME) of the middle symbol row Z2. After the reach line is formed, a character imitating a boy is displayed at the center of the variable display area (center of the variable display area ME) of the middle symbol row Z2, and after the reach line is formed in the super reach C, A character imitating a girl is displayed at the center of the variable display area of the middle symbol row Z2 (the center of the variable display area ME).

<Confirmation process for suspension notice>
Next, a description will be given, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 30, of the confirmation processing for the suspension notice executed in step S302 of the special power special figure control processing (FIG. 28).

  In the confirmation processing for suspension notice, first, in step S401, the suspension information newly acquired in the suspension information acquisition processing in step S301 immediately before in the special figure special power control processing (FIG. 28) is transmitted to the main MPU 402. Store in a register. Thereafter, in steps S402 to S406, it is confirmed whether or not the information of the jackpot winning is included in the hold information acquired by the current winning.

  Specifically, first, in step S402, based on the current prize in the upper operating port 62 or the lower operating port 63, the information for the jackpot determination of the newly acquired suspension information, that is, the acquired jackpot random number counter C1 Figure out the value of

  In a succeeding step S403, it is determined whether or not the mode is the low probability mode. Specifically, by determining whether or not the high-probability mode flag is stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 404, it is determined whether or not the current success / failure lottery mode is the low-probability mode. If the mode is the low-probability mode, the process proceeds to step S404, and the information for the jackpot determination (the value of the big-hit random number counter C1) grasped in step S402 by referring to the low-probability mode winning / failure table is information corresponding to the big-hit winning. Identify if they are included in the group. If the mode is the high probability mode, the process proceeds to step S405, and it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is included in the information set as the jackpot winning by referring to the winning / not-hitting table for the high probability mode described above. I do.

  After step S404 or step S405, the process proceeds to step S406, and it is determined whether the information for jackpot determination (the value of the jackpot random number counter C1) grasped in step S402 corresponds to the jackpot winning. If it corresponds to the jackpot winning, the jackpot information is stored in the register of the main MPU 402 in step S407, and the confirmation process for the final notice is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S406, the process proceeds to step S408. In step S408, based on the current prize in the upper operating port 62 or the lower operating port 63, the information for determining out-of-reach among the newly acquired hold information, that is, the value of the acquired reach random number counter C3 is grasped.

  In the following step S409, the reach determined in step S408 is referred to by referring to the reach determination table (reach determination information group) stored in the reach determination table storage area (reach determination information group storage means) of the RPM 403. It specifies whether the information for determination (the value of the reach random number counter C3) is included in the information set as the reach winning.

  After executing the processing of step S409, the process proceeds to step S410, and it is determined whether the information for reach determination (the value of the reach random number counter C3) grasped in step S408 corresponds to the occurrence of reach. If it is determined that the reach is supported, the reach confirmation information is stored in the register of the main MPU 402 in step S411, and then the present confirmation processing ends. On the other hand, when it does not correspond to the occurrence of the reach, the present confirmation processing is ended as it is.

<Hold command setting processing>
Next, the hold command setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  In the hold command setting processing, first, in step S501, it is determined whether or not the jackpot information is stored in the register of the main MPU 402, so that the immediately preceding hold notice in the special figure special power control processing (FIG. 28) is performed. It is determined whether or not the information for jackpot determination corresponds to the jackpot winning in the confirmation process (FIG. 30). If the jackpot information is stored, the process proceeds to step S502, and a jackpot response suspension command is set. The setting of the above commands and the setting of various commands to be described later are performed by storing command information in a command setting area provided in the RAM 404.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S501, that is, if it is determined that the jackpot information is not stored in the register of the main MPU 402, the process proceeds to step S503, and whether the reach occurrence information is stored in the register of the main MPU 402 is determined. By determining whether or not the information for reach determination is identified as corresponding to the occurrence of reach in the immediately preceding confirmation processing for reservation notice (FIG. 30) in the special figure special power control processing (FIG. 28). Is determined. If the reach occurrence information is stored, the off-reach correspondence suspension command is set in step S504, and if the reach occurrence information is not stored, the complete-offset correspondence suspension command is set in step S505.

  When setting the hold command in steps S502, S504, and S505, the variable display time is determined by referring to the stored value of the jackpot type counter C2, the value of the variable type counter CS, and the like. The time-consuming information is stored in the pending command. In determining the variable display time, a variable display time table is referred to. The hold command set in this manner is transmitted to the display control device 170, and the display control device 170 can grasp the variable display mode and the like of the symbol based on the hold command.

  After executing any of the command setting processes of step S502, step S504, and step S505, in step S506, a process of setting information on the number of held items in the above-mentioned held command is executed. Specifically, the information of the set pending command is configured as a plurality of bytes of information, and for some of the bits, information indicating that the command is a pending command, , And information on the number of items to be suspended can be set. In this case, in step S506, first, the information of the reserved number stored in the register of the main MPU 402 in step S401 in the immediately preceding confirmation processing for suspension notice (FIG. 30) is read out, and thereafter, the already set suspension The information of the number of reserved items read out is stored in the command for the information bit of the number of reserved items by an arithmetic processing such as a logical sum. As a result, with respect to the hold command set in any of the processes of step S502, step S504, and step S505, information for specifying the order of the hold information corresponding to the hold command Will be included. After executing the processing of step S506 described above in detail, the hold command setting processing ends.

  The suspension command including the information on the number of suspensions in step S506 is transmitted to the notification and effect control device 143. The notification / production control device 143 specifies that the hold information has been increased by receiving the hold command. In addition, the notification / production control device 143 transmits the hold command to the display control device 170 while maintaining the form. The display control device 170 executes processing for preparing image data based on the received hold command. The preparation process will be described later in detail.

  In addition, the setting method of the hold command is determined by the hold command in the display control device 170, whether or not a jackpot is won, in the case of a jackpot win, the jackpot type at that time, and in the case of not being a jackpot, whether or not reach occurs, in other words, It is optional as long as the variable display mode of the symbol can be specified. For example, a combination of a jackpot-response hold command, a miss-reach-response hold command, and a complete-miss-response hold command are individually set in correspondence with the respective numbers of held items. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which one pending command is selected according to the confirmation result in FIG. 30).

<Payout status receiving process>
Next, the payout state receiving process executed in step S218 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 27) will be described.

  Here, the payout control device 181 executes payout state detection processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 32 at regular intervals (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec), and executes processing corresponding to reception of various commands in the processing. I do. Here, first, a payout state detection process by the payout control device 181 will be described, and then, a payout state receiving process by the main control device 162 will be described.

  In the payout state detection processing, first, it is determined in step S601 whether or not the winning ball completion state is detected. Specifically, it is confirmed that the game balls corresponding to the number of winning balls of the winning ball command received from the main control device 162 have been paid out from the payout device 222 (payout is completed). Note that the payout device 222 is provided with a payout detection sensor that individually detects game balls that are sent to the downstream side, and confirms that payout has been completed based on the output result of the payout detection sensor. .

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S601, the payout motor abnormality command is stored in the transmission data storage unit in step S602 to set it as an output target. When a negative determination is made in step S601 or after execution of step S602, it is determined in step S603 whether or not the lower plate full state is detected. Specifically, the full state of the lower plate 34 is detected by checking the output result of the full state detection sensor 280. When the number of game balls stored in the lower plate 34 (and the lower horizontal passage portion 286 of the front plate side lower plate passage portion 273) is smaller than a predetermined number, the full detection sensor 280 corresponds to the LOW corresponding to the non-detection. A prize detection signal of a level is output, and when the number is equal to or more than a predetermined number, a prize detection signal of a HI level corresponding to the detection is output during detection. If the detection signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level and the detection signal of the HI level is detected a plurality of times thereafter, it is determined that the lower plate is full.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S603, the lower plate full command is stored in the transmission data storage unit in step S604 to set it as an output target. When a negative determination is made in step S603 or after execution of step S604, it is determined in step S605 whether an abnormal end state is detected. Specifically, the state is changed from a state in which one of the above-described abnormal state of the dispensing motor and a state in which the lower plate is full is detected to a state in which the state is not detected, and each of the states is detected over a plurality of processing times. If not, it is determined to be in an abnormal end state.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S605, an abnormal end command is stored in the transmission data storage unit in step S606 to set the command as an output target. If a negative determination is made in step S605 or after execution of step S606, the payout state detection process ends.

  Here, in the present pachinko machine 10, the power from the power supply / emission control device 191 is supplied to the RAM 404 of the main control device 162, but is not supplied to the RWM of the payout control device 181. With this configuration, the capacity of the power supply / emission control device 191 can be reduced, and the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced accordingly.

  However, in this configuration, when the power supply from the external power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, all the information stored in the RWM of the payout control device 181 is deleted (destroyed). In this case, if all information on the number of unpaid prize balls is stored in the RWM of the payout control device 181 as in a conventional pachinko machine, if the number of unpaid prize balls is present, the pachinko machine 10 When the power supply is stopped, all the unpaid prize balls are deleted without being paid. Then, a great disadvantage is given to the player.

  On the other hand, in the present pachinko machine 10, the unpaid prize ball information is basically stored in the RAM 404, and the main MPU 402 receives the HI level payout permission signal from the payout control device 181 when the payout control signal is received. A prize ball command is transmitted to the device 181. In the payout control device 181, the information on the number of prize balls stored in the RWM of the payout control device 181 indicates, at maximum, the maximum prize ball number (15 prize ball numbers) for one winning, and a permission criterion described later. The timing at which the payout permission signal is switched between the HI level and the LOW level is set so as to be the sum of the numbers. It should be noted that this permission reference number is equal to or less than the minimum number of prize balls for one winning. Thus, even if the supply of power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped in a situation where a large number of unpaid prize balls remain, it is possible to minimize the number of prize balls deleted at that time. That is, the payout permission signal is information output from the payout control device 181 to the main MPU 402 in order to specify the output timing of the winning ball command in the main MPU 402.

  In the payout state receiving process, based on information received from the payout control device 181 including the payout permission signal, it is determined whether or not it is possible to output a prize ball command to the payout control device 181. Make the settings for

  Now, in the payout state receiving process executed by the main control device 162, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 33, first, in step S701, it is determined whether or not a lower plate full command has been received from the payout control device 181. . The lower plate full command is transmitted from the payout control device 181 when the full state of the lower plate 34 is detected by the fullness detection sensor 280 as described above, and corresponds to a payout abnormality command.

  If the tank-ball-less command has been received, processing for abnormal payout is executed in step S702. As the processing for the abnormal payout, the abnormal payout flag is set to “1” in the RAM 404 to set the abnormal payout state. In addition, the lower plate full command is transmitted to the notification / effect controller 143 which is a sub-side controller as a payout abnormality command. In this case, in the notification / production control device 143, the receipt of the delivery abnormality command triggers the delivery abnormality notification in the lamp units 26 to 28 and the speaker units 29 and 30. Note that such a payout abnormality notification may be executed by the symbol display device 75.

  When a negative determination is made in step S701 or after the processing in step S702 is performed, it is determined in step S703 whether an abnormal end command has been received from the payout control device 181. As described above, the abnormal end command is transmitted from the payout control device 181 when a predetermined abnormality related to the payout of the game ball is released. If an abnormal termination command has been received, processing for abnormal termination is executed in step S704. Specifically, the abnormal dispensing state is canceled by clearing the abnormal dispensing flag “0” in the RAM 404.

  In the configuration in which the abnormal payout command is transmitted as described above as the abnormal payout processing, the abnormal payout release command is transmitted to the notification and effect control device 143 as the abnormal end processing. In this case, the notification / production control device 143 ends the payout abnormality notification that has already been executed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S703 or after the processing in step S704 is performed, it is determined in step S705 whether or not a prize ball completion command has been received from the payout control device 181. As described above, the prize ball completion command is transmitted from the payout control device 181 when the prize ball is completed, and includes information on the number of completed prize balls.

  If the prize ball completion command has not been received, the main payout state receiving process is terminated as it is. If the prize ball completion command has been received, the external output process of the number of prize balls is executed in step S706. The payout state receiving process ends. In the external output processing of the number of awarded balls, a process for performing an external output for causing the management computer of the gaming hall to recognize information on the number of awarded balls completed this time is executed.

  It should be noted that the winning ball completion command may not be transmitted from the payout control device 181. Further, in this configuration, the payout control device 181 is also electrically connected to the external terminal plate 213, so that the external output of information that the prize ball is completed and the information of the completed prize ball number is performed without passing through the main MPU 402. The configuration executed by the control device 181 may be adopted.

<Sound output control processing by effect control device 143>
The notification / production control device 143 forcibly shifts the regulation member 363 to the closed state in accordance with the driving of the regulation drive unit 366, so that the game ball to the sound passage 333 is emitted more than the sound is emitted from the horn area 371. It has become possible to prioritize spill regulations. Further, forcibly shifting the regulating member 363 to the closed state also actively limits the emission of sound from the horn area 371, and the notification / production control device 143 sets the sound emission limit to the sound. It is possible to use it for production as a limited production.

  Here, the notification and effect control processing executed by the notification and effect control device 143 will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS.

  In FIG. 34, in step S801, a pending command corresponding process for responding to the pending command output from main controller 162 is performed. The hold command handling process will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. Note that the pending command handling process is a command handling process executed by the broadcast / effect controller 143 when a command is transmitted from the main controller 162 to the alert / effect controller 143, which corresponds to the pending command. It is.

  In the suspension command handling process, first, it is determined in step S901 whether a jackpot handling command has been received. Here, the sub-MPU 432 of the notification / production control device 143 receives a command from the main control device 162, and the received command is temporarily stored in a command storage area of the RAM 434. The command storage area is configured as a ring buffer that can store a plurality of commands individually and can read from the previously stored command. Even when a plurality of commands are received at the same time, The processing corresponding to the command can be favorably executed. In the determination in step S901, it is determined whether a jackpot response suspension command has been received in the area to be read this time in the command storage area. Note that the configuration for reading such a command is the same for the following command reading.

  If the jackpot response suspension command has been received, in step S902, information on the number of suspensions included in the command received this time is specified, and the information on the specified suspension number is stored in various counter areas of the RAM 434. Set the erase counter. As will be described later, the information on the number of holds set in the erasing counter is updated so as to be decremented by one each time a new game starts.

  After setting the erasure counter in step S902, a jackpot handling setting process is executed in steps S903 to S907.

  In the jackpot response setting process, first, in step S903, it is determined whether or not the hold command received this time corresponds to any of super reach AC. In the present embodiment, a plurality of symbol variable display modes are set so that the jackpot winning expectation is different, and a configuration is adopted in which the jackpot winning expectation in the game times is notified by each variable display mode. However, in the above step S903, it is determined whether or not the hold command corresponds to the super reach A to C by referring to the change display pattern storage area of the ROM 433.

  If a negative determination is made in step S903, the setting process ends. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S903, that is, if any of the hold information corresponds to the super reach A to C, the process proceeds to step S904. In step S904, a lottery process table for the sound-reducing effect corresponding to the big hit stored in the lottery table storage area of the ROM 433 is referred to, and in a succeeding step S905, a lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to execute the sound-restricting effect. .

  Specifically, the value of the lottery counter of the sound restriction effect is read from the lottery counter of the RAM 434, and the lottery table of the sound restriction effect stored in the ROM 433 (sound restriction effect lottery information group) is referred to. It is determined whether the read value of the lottery counter corresponds to the winning result. The value of the lottery counter is configured to be updated (incremented by one) every time the hold command processing is started, that is, at a cycle of about 2 msec.

  After executing the processing of step S905, the process proceeds to step S906, and it is determined whether or not the sound restriction effect has been won. If a negative determination is made in step S906, this setting process ends. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S906, the flow proceeds to step S907, and a sound restriction effect flag is set. The sound restriction effect flag is a flag that is set in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 434, and indicates that the sound restriction effect is to be performed when the jackpot response hold command is received (big hit reach). Things.

  After executing the processing in step S907, the process proceeds to step S908, where a jackpot is dealt with the reserved information storage area of the RAM 434 (specifically, the first to eighth areas where the reserved information is not stored among the youngest areas). To be held (specifically, information on whether or not a sound restriction effect is possible) is set, and the present hold command handling process ends.

  Here, the configuration relating to the hold information storage area will be supplementarily described. The hold information storage area has the first to eighth areas as described above, and is configured to store one hold information for each area. The hold information stored in the first area to the eighth area is sequentially shifted to the lower area side by receiving the shift command from the main control device 162, that is, when the game round is started. . Specifically, while clearing the data of the first area, the second area → the first area, the third area → the second area, the fourth area → the third area..., The eighth area → the seventh area, and so on. The data in each area is shifted. In the reserved ball storage area of the main control device 162, the upper working port reserved area and the lower working port reserved area are provided separately, but in the reserved information storage area of the notification / effect control device 143, The configuration is such that the hold information is stored collectively in chronological order regardless of the destination of the ball.

  Returning to the description of step S901, if it is determined in step S901 that the jackpot response suspension command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S909. In step S909, it is determined whether an off-reach-response suspension command has been received.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S909, that is, if it is determined that the out-of-reach support command is received, out-of-reach support setting processing is executed in steps S910 to S914.

  In the out-of-reach correspondence setting processing, first, in step S910, it is determined whether or not the hold command received this time corresponds to any of super reach A to C. In the present embodiment, a plurality of symbol variable display modes are set so that the jackpot winning expectation is different, and a configuration is adopted in which the jackpot winning expectation in the game times is notified by each variable display mode. However, in the above step S910, it is determined whether or not the hold command corresponds to the super reach A to C by referring to the change display pattern storage area of the ROM 433.

  When a negative determination is made in step S910, the present setting process ends. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S910, that is, if any of the hold information items corresponds to super reach A to C, the process proceeds to step S911. In step S911, a lottery process for determining whether or not to execute the above-described sound limit effect is executed in step S912 with reference to the lottery process table for the sound limit effect corresponding to the deviation stored in the lottery table storage area of the ROM 433. I do.

  Specifically, the value of the lottery counter of the sound restriction effect is read from the lottery counter of the RAM 434, and the value of the read-out lottery counter is read with reference to the sound restriction effect lottery table stored in the ROM 433. It is determined whether or not it corresponds to the winning result. The value of the lottery counter is configured to be updated (incremented by one) every time the hold command processing is started, that is, at a cycle of about 2 msec.

  After executing the processing of step S912, the process proceeds to step S913, and it is determined whether or not the sound restriction effect has been won. If a negative determination is made in step S913, the present setting process ends. On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S913, the process proceeds to step S914, and a sound restriction effect flag is set. The sound restriction effect flag is a flag that is set in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 434. By being set, the sound restriction effect flag indicates that a sound restriction effect is to be performed when a release reach correspondence hold command is received (miss reach). It is shown.

  After the processing of step S914 is performed, the process proceeds to step S908, in which a suspension information storage area of the RAM 434 (specifically, an area where the suspension information is not stored in the first to eighth areas in which the suspension information is not stored) corresponds to the departure. To be held (specifically, information on whether or not a sound restriction effect is possible) is set, and the present hold command handling process ends.

  In the hold command corresponding processing described in detail above, it is determined whether or not to execute the sound restriction effect with reference to the hold command, and the result is stored in the hold information storage area.

  The notification / effect control device 143 is configured to specify an effect mode such as a change display mode when receiving a change start command from the main control device 162. At this time, it is specified whether or not to perform the sound restriction effect by referring to the area corresponding to the change start command in the hold information storage area. In other words, whether or not a sound restriction effect is possible is specified when a hold command is received before a change start command is received, and when a change start command is received, only the specified result is referred to. The lottery of the sound restriction effect is not performed again.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 34, after performing the hold command corresponding process of step S801, the process proceeds to step S802, and it is determined whether the lower plate 34 is full. Here, it is determined whether or not a lower plate full command has been received from main controller 162, and if it has been received, lower plate 34 is determined to be full.

  If the lower plate 34 is full, the process advances to step S803 to perform a closing process of shifting the sound passage 333 to the closed state. In this process, the regulating member 363 is forcibly shifted to the closed state by driving the regulating driving unit 366. Thus, the horn region 371 is partitioned into the sound passage 333 and the front door side lower plate passage 273 by the regulating member 363.

  In the closing process of the sound passage 333, when the regulating member 363 is already in the closed state, the closed state is maintained without driving the regulating drive unit 366. In this case, the closing process of the sound passage 333 corresponds to a holding unit that holds the sound passage 333 in a closed state.

  Here, when the game balls are piled up in the front door side lower plate passage portion 273 due to the lower plate 34 being full, the stacked game balls are transferred from the lower plate passage hole 344 to the sound passage 333. There is a concern that the vehicle may enter, or that the regulating member 363 may not be able to shift to the closed state by being caught by the stacked game balls. On the other hand, in the front door side lower plate passage portion 273, since the fullness detection sensor 280 is arranged at a position separated from the lower plate passage hole 344 on the downstream side, the stacked game balls are placed in the lower plate passage hole. The regulating member 363 can be forcibly shifted to the closed state at a timing before reaching the position 344, and as a result, it is possible to surely restrict the game ball from entering the sound passage 333 through the lower plate passage hole 344. it can.

  If the lower plate 34 is not full, the process advances to step S804 to determine whether the gaming state is in the open / close execution mode. If the mode is the open / close execution mode, the process proceeds to step S803, and the sound passage 333 is closed.

  Here, when the gaming state is the opening / closing execution mode, a large number of winnings to the variable winning device 64 occur, and a large number of game balls paid out from the payout device 222 intermittently cause the front door side lower plate passage portion to intermittently. 273. In this case, the opening / closing speed when the regulating member 363 opens and closes with the flow of the game ball does not catch up with the intermittent flow of a large number of game balls, and the game ball is caught by the regulating member 363, resulting in ball clogging. It cannot be said that there is no possibility. On the other hand, when the game state shifts to the opening / closing execution mode, even if the lower plate 34 is not full, the forcible shift of the regulating member 363 to the closed state enables the lower side of the front door. The cause itself of the clogged ball in the dish passage portion 273 can be eliminated.

  If the lower plate 34 is not full and the gaming state is not in the open / close execution mode (NO in step S804), it is determined in step S805 whether or not the sound restriction effect flag is set, and step S806 is performed. It is determined whether or not any of the super reach A to C is executed as a super reach effect. If the sound restriction effect flag is set and the super reach effect is being executed, the process proceeds to step S803. Even when the super reach effect is being executed, the sound limit effect is not performed unless the sound limit effect flag corresponding to the super reach effect is set.

  In step S803, the sound passage 333 is closed. In the super reach effect, the sound restriction effect process is performed by closing the sound passage 333. Here, when the super reach effect is performed, there are cases where sound is emitted to the lower plate 34 through the horn area 371 and cases where sound is not emitted. This can increase the expectation of winning the jackpot. In particular, in the present embodiment, unless the lower plate 34 is full, sound is emitted to the lower plate 34 in an effect other than the super reach effect. Therefore, when the sound-restricted production is performed in accordance with the super-reach production, the release of sound to the lower plate 34 is regulated, thereby securing a difference from other productions, and the degree of expectation of winning a jackpot Can be increased.

  If the super-reach effect is not being performed with the sound restriction effect flag set (NO in step S806), the process advances to step S807 to determine whether the sound restriction effect has been completed. Here, it is determined whether or not the super reach effect corresponding to the sound limit effect flag has been executed, and even if the sound limit effect flag is set, the super reach effect corresponding to the sound effect limit flag has not been executed yet. In this case, it is assumed that the sound restriction effect has not been completed.

  If the sound restriction effect has ended, that is, if the super reach effect corresponding to the sound restriction effect flag has ended, the process proceeds to step S808. In step S808, the sound restriction effect flag corresponding to the ended sound restriction effect is cleared. Thus, after the sound-restricted effect ends, there is no inconvenience that the sound-restricted effect is executed even when the lottery for the sound-restricted effect has not been won in the next super reach effect.

  If the lower plate 34 is not full, the game state is not the open / close execution mode, and the sound restriction effect flag is not set (if step S805 is NO), the process proceeds to step S809 to open the sound passage 333. Perform release processing. In this process, when the regulating member 363 is held in the closed state by the regulating drive section 366, the regulating member 363 is shifted to the fully open state by driving the regulating drive section 366, and thereby the sound passage 333 is moved. Move to an open state. On the other hand, when the regulating member 363 is already in the fully opened state, the sound path 333 is maintained in an open state by not driving the regulating drive unit 366. In addition, by performing the opening process of the sound passage 333, the regulating member 363 is opened and closed so as to shift from the fully opened state to the non-fully opened state as the game ball flows down.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

<About the enclosure 331>
Since the rear side of the lower speaker 30a is housed in the enclosure 331, it is possible to suppress the output sound from the rear side of the lower speaker 30a from canceling the output sound from the front side of the lower speaker 30a. For this reason, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the volume of the sound output from the lower speaker 30a in the low frequency range. Moreover, since the enclosure 331 has the front door side lower plate passage 273, the size of the enclosure 331 can be reduced as compared with a configuration in which the entire enclosure 331 is formed by a dedicated space. Accordingly, it is possible to appropriately arrange the enclosure 331 in a narrow space inside the pachinko machine 10.

  Since the lower speaker 30a has the diaphragm 30b, for example, a vibrator is attached to the front door side passage forming portion 276 so that the front door side passage forming portion 276 is used as an external diaphragm. Differently, the game ball existing in the front door side passage forming portion 276 does not hinder the vibration of the diaphragm 30b. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the sound quality of the sound output from the lower speaker 30a from being lowered by the game ball. Further, by using the dynamic speaker unit as the lower speaker 30a, the cost burden can be reduced as compared with a configuration in which a speaker having a vibrator is used as the lower speaker 30a, for example.

  In the enclosure 331, since the output sound from the rear side of the lower speaker 30a is emitted through the horn area 371, the bass range of the output sound is easily amplified. For this reason, with respect to the output sound from the rear side of the lower speaker 30a, the volume of the low-tone range, which tends to be insufficient, can be increased by the horn area 371. In particular, in the lower door passage portion 273 on the front door side, the cross-sectional area of the portion forming the horn area 371 gradually increases toward the first ball inlet 34a, thereby creating an environment in which game balls can easily flow down. As a result, ball clogging is less likely to occur.

  Also, in the front door side lower plate passage portion 273, since the cross-sectional area becomes larger toward the downstream side, the storage amount of the game balls becomes larger toward the downstream side, and the lower plate 34 becomes full. Even so, it is possible to realize a configuration in which the stacked game balls are difficult to reach the payout device 222. When the stacked game balls reach the payout device 222, an abnormality occurs in the payout device 222 without the rotating body 222e rotating even though the drive current is flowing through the payout motor of the payout device 222. I am concerned about the situation.

  Since the horn area 371 is bent, middle and high sounds output from the rear side of the lower speaker 30a are easily attenuated. For this reason, it is possible to emphasize the bass range of the sound emitted from the front door side lower plate passage portion 273 toward the lower plate 34. That is, the horn region 371 can function as a back load horn.

  The front door side lower plate passage portion 273 has a bent shape in order to reduce the velocity of the game ball flowing down, and the bent portions (the middle bent portion 304 and the downstream bent portion 305) are used to reduce the mid-high sound. Will also be available. Further, in the front door side lower plate passage portion 273, since the horizontal passage portions 284, 286 and the vertical passage portion 285 extend linearly, the game ball can be accelerated to some extent by the linear portion. Accordingly, even if the front door side lower plate passage portion 273 has a bent shape, it is possible to suppress the flow velocity of the game ball from extremely decreasing and the front door side lower plate passage portion 273 from being clogged. .

  In the horn area 371, since the front door side lower plate passage 273 and the air chamber 332 are connected by the sound passage 333, the degree of freedom regarding the relative position of the air chamber 332 with respect to the front door side lower plate passage 273 is increased. be able to. In addition, the sound passage 333 can solve the problem that the length of the horn region 371 is insufficient with only the front door side lower plate passage 273 when constructing the back load horn. In other words, the horn area 371 can be set to an appropriate length by the sound passage 333 without changing the length of the lower door passage 273 and the installation position of the lower passage 344.

  At the first ball inlet 34a of the horn area 371, the cross-sectional area is exponentially increased toward the lower plate 34, so that the sound emitted from the horn area 371 can easily advance toward the front of the pachinko machine. ing. That is, it is possible to make the sound emitted from the horn area 371 have directivity. In this case, the sound emitted from the horn area 371 is not easily diffused up, down, left, and right along the back wall 243 of the lower plate 34, and the sound can be heard by the player at an appropriate volume. ing.

  Since the regulating member 363 is provided for the lower plate passage hole 344, the outflow of the game ball from the lower door passage portion 273 to the sound passage 333 can be regulated by the restricting member 363. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a situation where the game balls flowing down the front door side lower plate passage portion 273 are not properly discharged to the lower plate 34. Here, when a game ball flows out from the front door side lower plate passage portion 273 to the sound passage 333, the game ball becomes a hindrance, and it is difficult for sound to be transmitted from the sound passage 333 to the front door side lower plate passage portion 273. And the sound quality may be reduced. Therefore, the regulation member 363 restricts the outflow of the game balls from the front door side lower plate passage portion 273 to the sound passage 333 by controlling the output sound from the rear side of the lower speaker 30a to the front door side lower plate passage portion. It is also effective in properly releasing 273.

  Since the front door side passage unit 45 has the front door side lower plate passage 273, the sound passage 333, and the air chamber 332, the front door side lower plate passage 273, the sound passage 333, and the air chamber 332 are connected to the front door. There is no need to perform a complicated operation of individually mounting the frames 14. In addition, by mounting the enclosure 331 in the pachinko machine 10 in a state of being manufactured in advance, the boundary between the front door side lower plate passage 273 and the sound passage 333 and the boundary between the sound passage 333 and the air chamber 332 in the enclosure 331. The occurrence of sound leakage from the section can be suppressed.

  Since the speaker opening 336 is provided in the front door side passage unit 45, the lower speaker 30 a is attached to the base frame 231 of the front door frame 14, and then the rear part of the lower speaker 30 a is connected to the air chamber 332. , The front door side passage unit 45 can be fixed to the base frame 231. In this case, since the lower speaker 30a and the front door-side passage unit 45 can be individually fixed to the base frame 231, the vibration of the diaphragm 30b of the lower speaker 30a causes the front door-side passage with respect to the base frame 231. It is possible to suppress that the fixed state of the unit 45 becomes unstable.

  In the front door side passage unit 45, since the air chamber 332 is arranged at a position not aligned with the front door side lower plate passage portion 273, the thickness dimension of the front door side passage unit 45 can be reduced. In addition, since the air chamber 332 is disposed below the front door side lower plate passage portion 273, the installation structure of the ball ball passage 118 and the ball receiving passage 289 above the front door side passage forming portion 276 becomes complicated. Can be suppressed. Therefore, while the upper space of the front door side passage forming portion 276 is used as a collection space for game balls, the lower space can be used as an installation space of the air chamber 332 instead of being a dead space.

  Since the air chamber 332 is disposed below the upper horizontal passage portion 284 and beside the vertical passage portion 285, the lower plate passage hole 344 can be disposed on the side surface of the vertical passage portion 285. In this case, for example, a configuration can be realized in which game balls are less likely to flow out from the lower dish passage hole 344 as compared with a configuration in which the lower dish passage hole 344 is arranged on the floor of the upper horizontal passage portion 284. Further, in the configuration in which the lower plate passage hole 344 is arranged on the floor of the upper horizontal passage portion 284, even if the lower plate passage hole 344 is a small hole, the game ball is caught by the small hole, so that the game ball flows down. Will be hindered.

<Restriction of sound emission from lower door passage 273 on front door side>
In the lower speaker 30a, a sound is output by vibrating the diaphragm 30b. Therefore, by reducing the opening of the regulating member 363 with respect to the lower plate passage hole 344, the sound from the front door side lower plate passage portion 273 is reduced. Sound emission can be limited. For this reason, the opening degree of the regulating member 363 decreases with the flow of the game ball, or the regulating member 363 is forcibly shifted to the closed state by the driving of the regulating driving unit 366, whereby the front door side lower plate passage is formed. The degree of freedom with respect to the mode of sound emission from the unit 273 can be increased.

  When the regulating member 363 is pressed by the flowing game ball, the opening degree of the regulating member 363 with respect to the lower plate passage hole 344 is reduced. It is possible to regulate the intake of the sound into the side dish passage portion 273. That is, it is possible to change the emission mode of the sound from the front door side lower plate passage 273 by using the flow of the game ball. In this case, the sound effect emitted from the front door side lower plate passage portion 273 can enhance the effect, and the player can lower the lower plate from the front door side lower plate passage portion 273 without visually recognizing the lower plate 34. It can be detected that the game ball has been discharged to 34.

  When the game ball passes through the regulating member 363, the opening degree of the regulating member 363 with respect to the lower plate passage hole 344 increases, so that the sound emission from the front door side lower plate passage portion 273 is restricted as the game ball flows down. Can be extremely short. As a result, the emission mode of the sound from the front door side lower plate passage portion 273 changes in accordance with the number of game balls flowing down the front door side lower plate passage portion 273, so that the effect of the sound is further enhanced. Can be.

  Since the regulating member 363 is rotatably supported on the base plates 274a and 274b, the flowing game ball pushes the regulating member 363 as compared with, for example, a configuration in which the regulating member 363 is slidably provided. The configuration can be easily realized. Further, the regulating member 363 can simply rotate to both close the lower plate passage hole 344 and partition the front door side lower plate passage portion 273 into an upstream side and a downstream side. . When the regulating member 363 is in the partitioned state, the sound taken into the front door side lower plate passage portion 273 from the lower plate passage hole 344 is transmitted to the upstream side by the restricting member 363, so that the front door side is restricted. The efficiency of sound emission from the lower plate passage 273 can be increased.

  Since the lower plate passage hole 344 is provided on the side surface of the vertical passage portion 285, as long as the opening degree of the restricting member 363 with respect to the lower plate passage hole 344 is reduced, the game ball passes over the restricting member 363. It will flow downstream. Therefore, even if the regulating member 363 is configured to close with the flow of the game ball, the regulating member 363 does not completely close the lower plate passage hole 344, so that even if the amount of sound taken in decreases. The capture of the sound through the lower plate passage hole 344 is continued. That is, even if the volume of the emitted sound is reduced, the emission of the sound from the front door side lower plate passage portion 273 is continued. Therefore, even if the player feels a sense of discomfort with the sound being interrupted as the game ball flows, the discomfort can be minimized.

  On the other hand, for example, in a configuration in which the lower plate passage hole 344 is provided in the floor of the upper horizontal passage portion 284, the passage of the game ball is performed so that the game ball is not caught in the lower plate passage hole 344. Accordingly, it becomes necessary for the regulating member 363 to completely close the lower plate passage hole 344. In this case, the emission of the sound from the front door side lower plate passage portion 273 is stopped, and there is a concern that the player may feel uncomfortable accordingly.

  Since the state transition of the regulating member 363 is forcibly performed by the notification / effect control device 143, the fully opened state and the non-fully opened state (including the closed state) of the regulating member 363 can be properly used. That is, the state in which the release from the front door side lower plate passage portion 273 is not restricted and the state in which the release is restricted can be appropriately used at an arbitrary timing. Thereby, the sound restriction effect can be performed by forcibly shifting the regulating member 363 to the closed state.

  When the lottery of the sound restriction effect is won, if the super reach effect is being executed, the sound restriction effect is performed by shifting the regulating member 363 to the closed state. It is possible to cause a difference in the degree of expectation for display between the case where the sound restriction effect is performed and the case where it is not performed. This makes it possible to further increase the degree of expectation of the super reach effect, which has a particularly high expectation among the reach effects.

<About the partition state of the regulating member 363>
Since the regulating member 363 can be shifted to the partition state, the sound taken into the front door side lower plate passage portion 273 from the lower plate passage hole 344 is diffused to the upstream side. It can be regulated by the regulating member 363 that it is inserted deep inside the front door side lower plate passage 273. For this reason, while the sound emission efficiency from the front door side lower plate passage portion 273 is improved, game balls are illegally paid out from the payout device 222 by the illegal jig inserted into the front door side lower plate passage portion 273. That can be suppressed.

  Since the regulation member 363 shifts to the downflow permission state, the game ball can flow down the downstream side after passing through the regulation member 363, so that the occurrence of clogging of the ball by the regulation member 363 can be suppressed. Thus, even if the intrusion of an illegal jig into the front door side lower plate passage 273 can be restricted by the restricting member 363, the game balls are properly discharged from the front door side lower plate passage 273 to the lower plate 34. can do.

  Since the regulating member 363 performs the closing operation by being pushed by the flowing game ball, after the regulating member 363 performs the closing operation, the game ball is moved to the partition position (the horn area 371 and the non-horn area 372) of the regulating member 363. Time lag is not caused before the vehicle reaches the boundary portion of (). Therefore, it is possible to suppress an improper act of intruding an illegal jig deeper than the regulating member 363 in accordance with the timing at which the game ball flows down. Moreover, since the regulating member 363 returns to the partitioned state at the timing when the pressing by the game ball is released, the period during which the regulating effect on the intrusion of the illegal jig is reduced can be extremely shortened.

  Since the restricting member 363 does not perform a further opening operation from the partition state (fully open state), the suspicious person tries to forcibly open the restricting member 363 toward the upstream side using an illegal jig. Also, the illegal jig cannot penetrate the regulating member 363. In particular, since the regulating member 363 is held in a partitioned state by its rotating distal end hooking on the rotating stopper 365, for example, compared to a configuration in which the rotating base end side of the regulating member 363 is hooked on the rotating stopper 365. In addition, the strength of holding the regulating member 363 in the partitioned state can be increased. In other words, the resistance against the forcible pushing of the regulating member 363 toward the upstream side by the illegal jig can be made extremely high.

  When the regulating member 363 is in the partition state, the lower plate passage hole 344 is open, so that the regulating member 363 can guide the intruding jig into the lower plate passage hole 344. That is, it becomes possible to guide the illegal jig from the front door side lower plate passage portion 273 to the outside. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the illegal jig from entering deep inside the front door side lower plate passage portion 273.

  When the regulating member 363 is in the partitioning state, the regulating member 363 forms the same plane as the inner peripheral surface of the lower plate passage hole 344. Therefore, even if the illegal jig reaches the regulating member 363, the illegal jig is regulated. The lower plate passage hole 344 can be guided along the plate surface of the member 363. In this case, unlike the case where the regulating member 363 is arranged in the front door side lower plate passage portion 273 at a position away from the lower plate passage hole 344 on the upstream side, the suspicious person can use the front door side lower plate passage portion 273. Cannot be grasped even in the direction extending from the lower plate passage hole 344 toward the upstream side. Moreover, since the lower surface of the regulating member 363 forms the same plane as the ceiling surface of the sound passage 333 (the third passage portion 353), the suspicious person can guide the illegal jig from the lower plate passage hole 344 to the sound passage 333. I can't even know what was done.

  Since the state of the regulating member 363 can be forcibly shifted by the notification / production control device 143, the priority is given to preventing the intrusion of an illegal jig by the regulating member 363, and the lower side of the front door. The case where the emission of the sound from the dish passage portion 273 is prioritized can be appropriately used.

  When the gaming state is in the open / close execution mode, the regulation member 363 is forcibly shifted to the closed state by the notification / effect control device 143. Therefore, even if a large number of game balls are paid out from the payout device 222, the front door side. Ball clogging in the lower plate passage 273 can be suppressed. Here, when the game state is in the open / close execution mode, the profit is given along with the payout of a large number of game balls, or the front door side lower plate passage against the game balls flowing down one after another. It is assumed that the possibility of inserting an unauthorized jig into the front door side lower plate passage portion 273 itself is low due to difficulties in inserting an unauthorized jig into the portion 273. Therefore, even if the regulating member 363 is not in the partitioning state, the deterrent to the illegal jig from being inserted into the front door side lower plate passage portion 273 does not significantly decrease.

  When the lower plate 34 is full, the notification and effect control device 143 forcibly shifts the restricting member 363 to the closed state, so that the game balls stacked on the front door side lower plate passage portion 273 are restricted. Even if it reaches 363, it can be avoided that the regulating member 363 is sandwiched between the game balls. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the restriction member 363 from being deformed or damaged due to a load being applied from the stacked game balls. Here, when the lower plate 34 is full, the improper jig is moved to a position where the front door side lower plate passage 273 is closed by the game ball. It is assumed that the possibility of being inserted into the lower dish passage 273 itself is low. Therefore, even if the regulating member 363 is not in the partitioning state, the deterrent to the illegal jig from being inserted into the front door side lower plate passage portion 273 does not significantly decrease.

<Restriction on outflow of game balls from lower plate passage hole 344>
Since the lower plate passage hole 344 is provided in the front door lower plate passage portion 273, the output sound from the lower speaker 30a can be efficiently taken into the front door side lower plate passage portion 273 through the lower plate passage hole 344. it can.

  Since the lower dish passage hole 344 is disposed at a position separated from the flow path of the game ball, it is possible to prevent the flowing game ball from flowing out of the lower dish passage hole 344. Further, in this case, it is also possible to prevent the flowing game balls from being caught in the lower dish passage hole 344 and the flowing game balls from closing the lower dish passage hole 344.

  Since the lower dish passage hole 344 is provided for the vertical passage portion 285, the lower dish passage hole 344 can be separated from the flow path of the game ball. Here, as a configuration in which the lower plate passage hole 344 is separated from the flow-down path of the game ball, a configuration in which the lower plate passage hole 344 is disposed on the ceiling of the upper horizontal passage portion 284 or the lower horizontal passage portion 286 can be considered. In these configurations, it is necessary to dispose the air chamber 332 and the sound passage 333 above the horizontal passage portions 284 and 286. Therefore, it is possible to arrange the ball receiving passage 289 above the upper horizontal passage portion 284, It becomes difficult to arrange the foul ball passage 118 above the passage portion 286. On the other hand, in the configuration in which the lower plate passage hole 344 is disposed on the side surface of the vertical passage portion 285, it is not necessary to dispose the air chamber 332 and the sound passage 333 above the horizontal passage portions 284 and 286. After arranging the lateral passage portion 286 and the foul ball passage 118 at appropriate positions, the lower plate passage hole 344 can be arranged at a position separated from the flow-down path of the game ball.

  Since the lower plate passage hole 344 is disposed in a portion on the side of the upper horizontal passage portion 284 (the vertical portion 342b of the lower plate passage partition portion 342) in the side surface portion, the game ball flowing down the upper horizontal passage portion 284 is provided. When the game ball reaches the vertical passage portion 285, the game ball can be moved to a side away from the lower plate passage hole 344. In addition, since the lower plate passage hole 344 extends downward from the floor of the upper horizontal passage portion 284 (the horizontal portion 342a of the lower plate passage partitioning portion 342), the game ball is transferred to the upper horizontal passage portion 284 and the vertical passage portion. Immediately after passing through the boundary with 285, it flows down the side of the lower plate passage hole 344. In this case, even if the game ball contacts the outer peripheral portion of the vertical passage portion 285 and its flowing direction changes, it is assumed that the game ball has already flowed to a position lower than the lower plate passage hole 344 at that timing. The outflow of the game ball from the lower plate passage hole 344 can be suppressed more reliably.

  Since the regulating member 363 is provided for the lower dish passage hole 344, the game ball flowing down in the front door side lower dish passage portion 273 can be prevented from flowing out from the lower dish passage hole 344 by the regulating member 363. . In this case, since the lower plate passage hole 344 does not need to be a small hole, the opening area of the lower plate passage hole 344 can be increased to such an extent that the efficiency of capturing sound from the lower plate passage hole 344 does not excessively decrease. . Thereby, it can suppress that the volume of the sound emitted from the front door side lower plate passage 273 is insufficient. In addition, since the regulating member 363 can be shifted to the non-regulating state, it is possible to prevent the efficiency of capturing the sound from the lower plate passage hole 344 from being reduced by the regulating member 363.

  The regulating member 363 performs the closing operation by being pressed by the game ball flowing down the front door side lower plate passage portion 273, so that the game ball can be more reliably prevented from flowing out from the lower plate passage hole 344.

  On the other hand, since the regulating member 363 is urged by the urging member so as to be held in the fully opened state, even if the closing operation is performed, the regulating member 363 returns to the fully opened state at the next moment. In this case, since the period in which the sound emitted from the front door side lower plate passage portion 273 is interrupted is extremely short, for example, the configuration in which the restricting member 363 is held in the closed state for a predetermined period as the game ball passes. On the contrary, it is possible to prevent the effect produced by the sound emitted from the front door side lower plate passage portion 273 from being significantly reduced.

  When the regulating member 363 is in the fully opened state, the regulating member 363 is in a partitioned state that partitions the front door side lower plate passage portion 273. Therefore, the sound transmitted from the sound passage 333 to the front door side lower plate passage portion 273 is lower than the front door side. Diffusion to the upstream side of the dish passage portion 273 can be suppressed. Thereby, the sound emission efficiency from the front door side lower plate passage portion 273 can be increased.

  Further, since the rotation stopper 365 is provided in the lower door passage portion 273 on the front door side, even when the opening operation of the regulating member 363 is performed by the urging force of the urging member, the regulating member 363 is not rotated. 365 can be maintained in a partitioned state.

  When the lower plate 34 is full, the regulating member 363 is forcibly shifted to the closed state by the notification and effect control device 143, so that the game balls stacked in the lower door passage 273 on the front door side are filled with the lower plate. Even if the game ball reaches the passage hole 344, it is possible to prevent the game balls from flowing out from the lower plate passage hole 344.

  In the front door side lower plate passage portion 273, the fullness detection sensor 280 is disposed downstream of the lower plate passage hole 344, so that the notification / effect controller 143 shifts the regulating member 363 to the closed state. It can be avoided that the game balls stacked at the timing of (3) reach the lower plate passage hole 344. Thereby, the deformation and breakage of the regulating member 363 can be more reliably suppressed. In addition, it is possible to reliably prevent the stacked game balls from flowing out from the lower dish passage hole 344.

<Second embodiment>
In the second embodiment, in the front door-side passage unit 45, the positions of the air chamber 332 and the sound passage 333 with respect to the front door-side lower plate passage 273 are different from those in the first embodiment. The configuration of 45 will be described with reference to FIG. 36, focusing on differences from the first embodiment. 36A and 36B are diagrams showing the internal structure of the front door side passage unit 45, in which FIG. 36A shows a case where the regulating member 363 is in a fully opened state, and FIG. 36B shows a case where the regulating member 363 is in a closed state. The figure is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 36A, in the front door side passage unit 45, the air chamber 332 and the sound passage 333 are arranged above the front door side lower plate passage portion 273. The air chamber 332 and the sound passage 333 are arranged above the lower horizontal passage 286, and are arranged side by side along the lower horizontal passage 286. In the first embodiment, the sound passage 333 is disposed between the air chamber 332 and the front door side lower plate passage 273. In the present embodiment, both the air chamber 332 and the sound passage 333 are connected to the front door. It is adjacent to the side lower plate passage 273.

  The front door side passage unit 45 includes an air chamber partition 451 that partitions the air chamber 332 and the sound passage 333, and a lower plate that partitions the front door side lower plate passage 273, the air chamber 332, and the sound passage 333. It has a passage partition 452. The sound passage 333 has a first passage portion 351, a second passage portion 352, and a third passage portion 353, as in the first embodiment. In the extended state, they are arranged side by side along the width direction of the front door side passage unit 45. In this case, only the first passage 351 of the passages 351 to 353 extends along the air chamber 332, and the air chamber partition 451 partitions the air chamber 332 and the first passage 351.

  The first passage 351 and the second passage 352 are arranged above the lower horizontal passage 286, while the third passage 353 is arranged above the vertical passage 285. The second passage portion 352 is disposed between the first passage portion 351 and the vertical passage portion 285, and thus is adjacent to the vertical passage portion 285. The third passage 353 is arranged at a position separated from the outer opening 279 toward the air chamber 332, and is arranged in series with the vertical passage 285 in the vertical direction. In this embodiment, although not shown, the foul ball passage 118 and the ball receiving passage 289 are disposed above the air chamber 332, the sound passage 333, and the upper horizontal passage portion 284.

  The lower dish passage partitioning portion 452 has a horizontal passage portion 452a forming the outer periphery of the upper horizontal passage portion 284 and a vertical passage portion 452b forming the outer periphery of the vertical passage portion 285. The horizontal passage portion 452a forms a ceiling of the upper horizontal passage portion 284, and divides the upper horizontal passage portion 284 into the air chamber 332, the first passage portion 351 and the second passage portion 352. The vertical passage portion 452b forms a side surface of the vertical passage portion 285, and partitions the vertical passage portion 285 from the second passage portion 352 and the third passage portion 353.

  The lower plate passage hole 344 is provided in a portion that separates the vertical passage portion 285 and the third passage portion 353 in the vertical passage portion 452b. The lower plate passage hole 344 is disposed above the vertical passage portion 285, and opens the vertical passage portion 285 upward. In this case, the lower plate passage hole 344 is disposed at a position separated upward from the flow path of the game ball, and the game ball flowing downward flows out from the lower plate passage hole 344. Things are less likely to occur. The lower plate passage hole 344 is arranged on the ceiling of the vertical passage portion 285.

  Also in the present embodiment, the regulating member 363 opens the lower dish passage hole 344 when in the open state, and closes the lower dish passage hole 344 when in the closed state. In the regulating member 363, the rotating shaft portions are arranged side by side on the ceiling of the upper horizontal passage portion 284. An upper concave portion 455 recessed upward is formed in the ceiling of the upper horizontal passage portion 284, and the rotation shaft portion of the regulating member 363 is disposed in the upper concave portion 455.

  As shown in FIG. 36B, when in the closed state, the regulating member 363 extends in the width direction of the vertical passage 285 and is disposed above the vertical passage 285. In this case, the regulating member 363 extends along the boundary between the third passage portion 353 and the front door side lower plate passage portion 273 (vertical passage portion 285), and the lower surface of the regulating member 363 is located on the upper horizontal passage portion 284. And the same plane as the ceiling surface. As described above, since the regulating member 363 does not protrude toward the front door side lower plate passage portion 273 when in the closed state, the game ball does not catch on the restricting member 363 in the front door side lower plate passage portion 273. It flows down properly.

  The front door side passage unit 45 has a reverse stopper 456 that regulates the regulation member 363 from rotating toward the third passage portion 353 from the closed state. The reverse stopper 456 is a convex portion protruding inward from the inner peripheral surface of the third passage portion 353, and the rotation end of the regulating member 363 is hooked on the reverse stopper 456 from the downstream side (the vertical passage portion 285 side). As a result, it is held in the closed state. The reverse stopper 456 is disposed on the opposite side of the upper concave portion 455 with the lower plate passage hole 344 interposed therebetween. For this reason, for example, even if the game balls stacked in the front door side lower plate passage portion 273 with the lower plate full reach the lower plate passage hole 344, the regulating member 363 is pushed open by the game balls. Can be suppressed.

  The restricting member 363 is opened by its lower end pivoting downward (in a direction away from the third passage 353). As shown in FIG. 36 (a), when the regulating member 363 is in the fully open state, the regulating member 363 extends the front door side lower plate passage 273 and the upper horizontal passage 284 in a state of extending downward from the rotation shaft. Side and the vertical passage portion 285 side. Here, a lower recess 457 that is recessed downward is provided in the floor of the upper horizontal passage portion 284, and when the regulating member 363 is in a fully opened state, the rotation tip of the regulating member 363 is moved downward. It is housed in the lower recess 457. In this case, the regulating member 363 is held in a fully opened state by its rotating tip portion being hooked on the lower concave portion 457 from the vertical passage portion 285 side.

  The regulating member 363 is in a state of being hung by the rotation shaft portion, and is held in a fully opened state by its own weight. For this reason, even when the urging member is not attached to the regulating member 363 as in the first embodiment, it is possible to realize a configuration in which the regulating member 363 is kept fully open.

  When in the fully opened state, the regulating member 363 is in a state of being bridged between the side surface of the third passage 353 and the side surface of the vertical passage 285. In this case, in the regulating member 363, the plate surface on the side of the vertical passage 285 forms the same plane as the inner peripheral surface of the third passage 353 and the inner peripheral surface of the vertical passage 285. For this reason, even if the illegal jig is inserted into the front door side lower plate passage portion 273, the tip of the illegal jig is hard to be caught by the regulating member 363, and the suspicious person who inserts the illegal jig, Even the existence of the regulating member 363 cannot be detected.

  In the configuration in which the third passage portion 353 extends upward from the vertical passage portion 285 as in the present embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, in addition to the sound passage 333 and the lower horizontal passage portion 286, All of the vertical passage 285 is included in the horn area 371. The regulating member 363 in the fully opened state divides the horn region 371 and the non-horn region 372 formed by the upper horizontal passage portion 284 into right and left.

  Here, since the non-horn area 372 extends laterally from an intermediate position of a vertically extending part (a part formed by the third passage 353 and the vertical passage 285) in the horn area 371, the non-horn area 372 is temporarily Even if a suspicious person who inserts the regular jig into the lower door passage 273 on the front door side detects the presence of the restricting member 363, it is very difficult for the illegal jig to enter the non-horn area 372 (the upper horizontal passage 284). It has become difficult. In addition, the regulating member 363 is prevented from rotating toward the non-horn area 372 side (upper side horizontal passage section 284 side) by its rotating front end portion being hooked on the lower concave portion 457. However, even if an attempt is made to force open the regulating member 363 with an illegal jig, the regulating member 363 cannot be pushed open.

  Next, the operation of the regulating member 363 will be briefly described.

  As shown in FIG. 36 (a), when the game ball does not pass through the boundary between the horn area 371 and the non-horn area 372 in the front door side lower plate passage 273, the regulating member 363 is fully opened due to its own weight. Held in state. For this reason, the sound output from the rear side of the lower speaker 30 a to the air chamber 332 is emitted from the horn area 371 to the lower plate 34 without diffusing to the non-horn area 372.

  As shown in FIG. 36 (b), when a game ball flowing down the front door side lower plate passage 273 reaches the regulation member 363 in the fully open building, the game ball vertically moves the regulation member 363. The horn passes through the boundary between the horn area 371 and the non-horn area 372 so as to be pushed open toward the passage 285 side. In this case, since the regulating member 363 exists between the game ball and the lower dish passage hole 344, the game ball pressing the regulating member 363 is restricted from flowing out from the lower dish passage hole 344.

  In addition, when the lower plate is full by the fullness detection sensor 280, the driving of the restriction driving unit 366 is performed by the notification and effect control device 143, so that the restriction member 363 shifts to the closed state. Thereby, it is possible to restrict the game balls stacked in the front door side lower plate passage portion 273 from flowing out from the lower plate passage hole 344 to the sound passage 333.

  Here, even if a game ball enters the third passage portion 353 through the lower plate passage hole 344, the game ball is extended due to the third passage portion 353 extending upward from the lower plate passage hole 344. Will return to the vertical passage 285 by dropping under its own weight. Further, since the urging force of the urging member is not applied to the regulating member 363, the return of the game ball to the vertical passage portion 285 is not hindered by the urging force of the urging member.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  Since the air chamber 332 is disposed above the front door side lower plate passage 273, the space above the front door side lower plate passage 273 can be effectively used as an installation space for the air chamber 332 and the lower speaker 30a. Can be. In addition, the space above the front door side lower plate passage 273 can also be used as an installation space for the sound passage 333.

  Since the lower plate passage hole 344 is arranged on the ceiling of the vertical passage portion 285, it is difficult for the game balls flowing down the upper horizontal passage portion 284 to rise toward the lower plate passage hole 344. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game balls from flowing out from the lower dish passage hole 344 to the sound passage 333 side.

  Since the regulating member 363 is in a fully open state because it is hung from the ceiling of the upper horizontal passage portion 284, the regulating member 363 is held in the fully open state, and the regulating member 363 is fully opened after the regulating member 363 performs a closing operation. Both of the configurations returning to the state can be realized without using the urging member. For this reason, it is possible to simplify the configuration in which both the sound and the game ball are properly released from the front door side lower plate passage portion 273.

<Third embodiment>
In the first embodiment, the enclosure 331 has the sound passage 333, but in the third embodiment, the enclosure 331 does not have the sound passage 333, and the air chamber 332 and the front door side lower plate passage are not provided. The portion 273 is connected without passing through the sound passage 333. The configuration of the front door side passage unit 45 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38. FIG. 37 is an exploded perspective view of the front door side passage unit 45, and FIG. 38 is a diagram showing an internal structure of the front door side passage unit 45. 38A shows a case where the partition member 461 is in the partition state, and FIG. 38B shows a case where the partition member 461 is in the flow permission state.

  As shown in FIGS. 37 and 38 (a), the front door side passage unit 45 does not have the sound passage 333, and the air chamber 332 is disposed below the front door side lower plate passage portion 273. . In this case, the lower plate passage partitioning portion 342 partitions the air chamber 332 and the front door side lower plate passage portion 273, and the air chamber 332 and the front door side lower plate passage portion 273 communicate with each other through the lower plate passage hole 344. Have been. The lower dish passage hole 344 is a small circular hole having a size and a shape through which a game ball cannot pass, and is provided in a large number in the lower dish passage partitioning part 342. The small holes may have an elliptical shape, a rectangular shape, or a polygonal shape.

  In the lower plate passage partitioning portion 342, the horizontal portion 342a vertically separates the upper horizontal passage portion 284 and the air chamber 332, and the vertical portion 342b partitions the vertical passage portion 285 and the air chamber 332 left and right. A plurality of lower dish passage holes 344 are arranged in each of the horizontal portion 342a and the vertical portion 342b. In both the horizontal portion 342a and the vertical portion 342b, the flow direction of the game ball and the front door side passage unit 45 A plurality are arranged along each of the thickness directions.

  The horn region 371 is formed by a region on the front door side lower plate passage portion 273 downstream of the lower plate passage hole 344.

  As described above, the lower dish passage hole 344 itself has a function of preventing outflow of the game ball. In the present embodiment, the regulating member 363 is not provided for the lower plate passage hole 344 as in the first embodiment, but the front door side lower plate passage portion 273 is partitioned into an upstream side and a downstream side. A partition member 461 is provided for the front door side lower plate passage portion 273. The partition member 461 is formed of a plate material similarly to the regulation member 363, and can block transmission of sound in the air.

  The partition member 461 is provided in a state of being suspended from the ceiling of the upper horizontal passage portion 284, and a state in which the partition member 461 extends downward by its own weight corresponds to a partition state in which the upper horizontal passage portion 284 is divided into right and left. I do. The partition member 461 is disposed upstream of each lower plate passage hole 344 in the front door side lower plate passage portion 273. When the partition member 461 is in the partition state, the partition member 461 is moved from the lower plate passage hole 344 to the front door side lower plate passage portion. This restricts the sound taken in 273 from being diffused upstream. Note that the partition member 461 corresponds to a partition body.

  The partition member 461 is rotatable with its upper end portion as a rotation shaft, and can be shifted to the non-partition state by rotating toward the upstream side or the downstream side. The rotation shaft of the partition member 461 is disposed at an intermediate position of the upper horizontal passage portion 284 in the downflow direction of the game ball, and the partition member 461 is rotated toward either the upstream side or the downstream side. , Can overlap the ceiling surface of the upper horizontal passage portion 284. Here, in the front door side lower plate passage portion 273, the upstream end of the upper horizontal passage portion 284 is opened upward toward the outer opening portion 279, and the partition member 461 is rotated toward the upstream side. When it is moved, it is arranged at a position where it does not protrude into the open portion of the upper horizontal passage portion 284.

  As shown in FIG. 38 (b), when the game ball flows down, the game ball passes through the partition member 461 while pushing and rotating the partition member 461 toward the downstream side. Here, when the partition member 461 rotates to such an extent that the game balls can pass, it means that the non-partitioned state has shifted to the downflow permission state in which the downflow of the game balls is permitted.

  Further, when the lower plate 34 is full, even if the game balls stacked in the front door side lower plate passage portion 273 push the partition member 461 toward the upstream side, the partition is not removed. The member 461 does not exist between the upstream end of the upper horizontal passage portion 284 and the outer opening 279. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the partition member 461 from being deformed or damaged by being pushed toward the upstream side by the stacked game balls.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  Since the lower plate passage hole 344 is formed as a small hole, it is possible to realize a configuration in which the output sound of the lower speaker 30a is taken in from the lower plate passage hole 344 to the front door side lower plate passage, and then a game is played from the lower plate passage hole 344. The ball can be prevented from flowing out. Moreover, since a large number of lower plate passage holes 344 are provided as small holes, when the output sound of the lower speaker 30a is taken in from the lower plate passage hole 344, the volume of the sound can be suppressed from being reduced.

  Further, when the output sound of the lower speaker 30a passes through a large number of lower plate passage holes 344, the low range is easily amplified, while the middle and high range is easily attenuated. Thereby, even if the length of the horn area 371 cannot be sufficiently secured because the enclosure 331 does not have the sound passage 333, the front plate side lower plate passage 273 to the lower plate 34 This makes it possible to emphasize the bass range of the emitted sound.

  In the lower plate passage partitioning part 342, since a plurality of lower plate passage holes 344 are arranged in each of the horizontal portion 342a and the vertical portion 342b, even if the lower plate passage hole 344 is a small hole, The total opening area of the lower plate passage hole 344 can be increased to an extent that the amount of sound taken in can be appropriately secured. In addition, since the horizontal portion 342a and the vertical portion 342b are different in the direction of sound pickup by the lower plate passage hole 344, the low range of these sounds is easily amplified, while the middle and high range is easily attenuated. Has become.

  In the upper horizontal passage portion 284, the lower plate passage hole 344 is formed in the floor portion, while the partition member 461 is suspended from the ceiling portion. Irrespective of the above, a configuration in which the lower plate passage hole 344 is not closed by the partition member 461 can be realized. For this reason, when the game ball pushes down the partition member 461 and flows down, the partition member 461 shifts to the non-partition state, so that the sound may diffuse upstream in the front door side lower plate passage portion 273. Also, it is possible to avoid stopping or restricting the intake of the sound from the lower plate passage hole 344 to the front door side lower plate passage portion 273.

  Since the enclosure 331 does not have the sound passage 333, it is possible to reduce the size of the front door side passage unit 45 and increase the size of the air chamber 332 as compared with the first embodiment. When the size of the air chamber 332 is increased, the size of the lower speaker 30a can be increased, that is, a speaker unit having a large output volume in a low-frequency range can be used as the lower speaker 30a.

<Fourth embodiment>
In the first embodiment, the regulating member 363 is provided so that the lower plate passage hole 344 can be opened. However, in the fourth embodiment, the regulating member is provided in a state where the lower plate passage hole 344 cannot be opened. . The configuration of the front door side passage unit 45 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is an exploded perspective view of the front door side passage unit 45.

  As shown in FIG. 39, similarly to the third embodiment, the front door side passage unit 45 does not have the sound passage 333, and the air chamber 332 and the front door side lower plate passage 273 are connected to the lower plate passage. The holes 344 communicate with each other. The lower plate passage hole 344 is provided so as to extend over the horizontal portion 342a and the vertical portion 342b. The lower plate passage hole 344 opens the air chamber 332 laterally in the horizontal portion 342a, while opening the air chamber 332 upward in the vertical portion 342b. In this case, the output sound of the lower speaker 30a is taken into both the upper horizontal passage portion 284 and the vertical passage portion 285 from the lower plate passage hole 344.

  The lower plate passage hole 344 is provided with a regulating member 465 for restricting the outflow of the game ball from the lower plate passage hole 344. The regulating member 465 has a pair of plate portions extending in a direction crossing each other, and is arranged in a state where one plate portion is arranged in series with the horizontal portion 342a and the other plate portion is arranged in series with the vertical portion. Have been. The regulating member 465 is fixed to the base plates 274a and 274b, the horizontal portion 342a, and the vertical portion 342b in a state where the lower plate passage hole 344 is closed. In this case, the regulating member 465 is in a state of entering the lower dish passage hole 344, and does not hinder the flow of the game ball.

  The regulating member 465 has a frame 466 extending along the inner peripheral surface of the lower dish passage hole 344, and a net 467 provided inside the frame 466. The frame portion 466 has two rectangular frames, one of which extends along the horizontal portion 342a, and the other frame extends along the vertical portion 342b. The net portion 467 is a dividing portion that divides the lower plate passage hole 344 into a plurality of portions, and permits transmission of sound through the lower plate passage hole 344 and regulates outflow of game balls from the lower plate passage hole 344. Both things are possible.

  The net portion 467 has a plurality of thin linear members such as a wire and a thread, and is formed by extending these linear members in a direction crossing each other. In the net portion 467, since the linear member is thin, it is difficult for the linear member to hinder sound transmission. For example, compared to a configuration in which the regulating member 465 is not provided in the lower plate passage hole 344. However, the sound transmission efficiency in the lower plate passage hole 344 is not significantly reduced.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  Since the regulating member 465 does not open and close with respect to the lower plate passage hole 344, the regulating member 465 does not partition the front door side lower plate passage portion 273 between the upstream side and the downstream side. That is, it is possible to prevent the flow of the game ball from being hindered by the regulating member 465. On the other hand, since the net portion 467 of the regulating member 465 is in a state in which the lower plate passage hole 344 is divided into a plurality, the outflow of the game ball from the lower plate passage hole 344 can be regulated by the regulating member 465. In addition, since the linear member of the net portion 467 is thin, the transmission efficiency of sound in the lower plate passage hole 344 is not easily reduced by the net portion 467. Therefore, the volume of the sound emitted from the front door-side lower plate passage 273 can be appropriately maintained without opening the regulating member 465.

  Since the regulating member 465 has the frame portion 466, the frame portion 466 is fixed to the front door side passage forming portion 276 (the base plates 274 a and 274 b and the connection plate 274 c), so that the net portion 467 is located on the front door side. It can be fixed to the passage forming portion 276. In this case, the fixing strength of the net portion 467 with respect to the front door side passage forming portion 276 is increased as compared with a configuration in which the net portion 467 is directly fixed to the front door side passage forming portion 276, so that the game balls flowing down and the game balls are stacked. Even if a load is applied to the net 467 from the game ball, the net 467 can be prevented from being deformed or damaged.

<Other embodiments>
Note that the present invention is not limited to the contents described in the above embodiments, and may be implemented as follows, for example. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to each of the above embodiments, or some or all of them may be combined and applied to each of the above embodiments.

  (A1) In the first embodiment, the horn area 371 has a bent shape by combining the vertical passage 285 and the lower horizontal passage 286 in the front door side lower plate passage 273. However, as long as the horn region 371 is bent, the horn region 371 may have an oblique passage extending in an oblique direction, or may be a combination of a plurality of lateral passages stacked vertically.

  Further, the front door-side lower plate passage portion 273 and the sound passage 333 do not have to have a linearly extending passage portion, but may have a bent shape. For example, even if it has a meandering shape like a wave shape, a bent shape is realized.

  (A2) In the first embodiment, the sound passage 333 has a plurality of sound bending portions 357, but the sound passage 333 may not have the sound bending portion 357. That is, the sound passage 333 may have a straight shape. Even in this case, if the sound passage 333 has a horn shape, the bass range of the sound transmitted through the sound passage 333 is easily amplified.

  (A3) In the first embodiment, the front door side lower plate passage portion 273 has the intermediate bent portion 304 and the downstream bent portion 305, but the front door side lower plate passage portion 273 has these bent portions 304, 305 may not be provided. That is, the front door side lower plate passage portion 273 may be formed in a straight shape. Even in this case, if the front door side lower plate passage portion 273 has a horn shape, the bass range of the sound transmitted through the front door side lower plate passage portion 273 is easily amplified.

  (A4) In the first embodiment, the cross-sectional area of the front door-side lower plate passage 273 gradually increases from the upstream end to the downstream end thereof. The cross-sectional area of the portion 273 may be arbitrarily set upstream of the lower plate passage hole 344. Even in this case, a configuration in which the cross-sectional area of the horn region 371 gradually increases toward the lower plate 34 can be realized.

  (A5) In the first embodiment, the regulating member 363 is provided for the lower plate passage hole 344 as the sound intake hole, but the regulating member 363 may not be provided. In this case, since the outflow of the game ball from the lower plate passage hole 344 is not restricted by the regulating member 363, a dedicated passage for discharging the game ball to the lower plate 34 or the front door side lower plate passage portion 273 is provided. It is preferable to be connected to the sound passage 333 and the air chamber 332. Thereby, even if the game ball flows out from the lower plate passage hole 344 to the sound passage 333, the game ball can be discharged to the lower plate 34.

  (A6) In the first embodiment, the front door-side passage unit 45 is formed by combining the base plates 274a and 274b and the connection plate 274c. However, the air chamber 332 and the sound passage 321 that have been manufactured in advance. The front door side passage unit 45 may be formed by attaching the 333 to the front door side passage forming portion 276 or the like. Also in this case, the air chamber 332 and the sound passage 333 can be attached to the base frame 231 of the front door frame 14 together with the front door side passage forming portion 276 and the like. Thus, the work load when attaching the air chamber 332, the sound passage 333, and the front door side passage forming portion 276 to the base frame 231 can be reduced.

  (A7) In the first embodiment, in the front door frame 14, the lower speaker 30a and the front door side passage unit 45 are individually fixed to the base frame 231. Although the front door side passage unit 45 is not fixed, the lower speaker 30a and the front door side passage unit 45 may be fixed to each other. In this case, the lower speaker 30a is attached to the front door side passage unit 45 in advance, and the front door side passage unit 45 and the lower speaker 30a can be collectively attached to the base frame 231. Thereby, the work load when attaching the front door side passage unit 45 and the lower speaker 30a to the base frame 231 can be reduced.

  (A8) In the first embodiment, the air chamber 332 and the sound passage 333 are arranged below the upper horizontal passage 284 as the lower side of the front door side lower plate passage 273. The 332 and the sound passage 333 may be arranged below the lower horizontal passage 286 and the vertical passage 285. In this case, it is preferable that the lower plate passage hole 344 is arranged on the floor of the lower horizontal passage portion 286 or the vertical passage portion 285.

  In the above-described second embodiment, the air chamber 332 and the sound passage 333 are disposed above the lower horizontal passage 286 above the front door-side lower plate passage 273. Alternatively, the sound passage 333 may be arranged at a position above the upper horizontal passage portion 284 or the vertical passage portion 285, and the sound passage 333 may be arranged at a side position of the front door side upper plate passage portion 272. In this case, it is preferable that the lower plate passage hole 344 is disposed on the ceiling of the upper horizontal passage portion 284 or the lower horizontal passage portion 286.

  Further, in the third embodiment, the lower plate passage hole 344 is provided as a small hole in each of the floor portion of the upper horizontal passage portion 284 and the side surface portion of the vertical passage portion 285. If the passage 333 is arranged above the front door side lower plate passage 273, the lower plate passage holes 344 are provided in the ceiling of the lower horizontal passage 286 and the side surface of the vertical passage 285, respectively. Is also good. As a result, the direction in which sound is taken in the lower plate passage hole 344 of the lower horizontal passage portion 286 and the lower plate passage hole 344 of the vertical passage portion 285 intersect, so that the low range is easily amplified and the middle and high range is attenuated. It can create an environment that is easy to do.

  (A9) In the first embodiment, the air chamber 332 and the sound passage 333 are arranged below the lower plate passage such as the front door lower plate passage 273 and the upper plate passage such as the front door upper plate passage 272. However, the air chamber 332 and the sound passage 333 may be disposed at positions overlapping the lower plate passage and the upper plate passage in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10.

  (B1) In the first embodiment, the rotation shaft is disposed at the upper end of the regulating member 363. However, the rotation shaft is disposed at the lower end or the middle of the regulating member 363. You may. For example, when the regulating member 363 in which the rotating shaft is disposed at the lower end is in the fully opened state, the regulating member 363 is configured to extend downward from the lower end of the lower plate passage hole 344. Also in this configuration, the regulation member 363 is forcibly shifted to the closed state by the regulation drive unit 366 at a timing before the flowing game ball reaches the vicinity of the bottom dish passage hole 344, whereby the lower dish is formed. The outflow of the game ball from the passage hole 344 can be regulated by the regulating member 363.

  (B2) In the first embodiment, the outflow of the game ball from the lower dish passage hole 344 is restricted or permitted according to the state of the regulating member 363. However, regardless of the state of the regulating member 363, The outflow of the game ball from the lower dish passage hole 344 may be restricted by the restriction member 363. For example, a configuration is adopted in which a rotation shaft portion is disposed at an intermediate portion of the regulating member 363, and the rotation shaft portion is disposed at a position dividing the lower plate passage hole 344 up and down. In this configuration, since the outflow of the game ball from the lower dish passage hole 344 is restricted by the rotating shaft of the regulating member 363, the lower dish passage hole 344 is independent of the state of the sound taken from the lower dish passage hole 344. Outflow of game balls from the game.

  (B3) In the first embodiment, the regulating member 363 is hooked on the rotation stopper 365 so that the opening degree is not shifted to a state where the opening degree is larger than the fully opened state. However, as in the third embodiment, The regulating member 363 may be configured to be able to shift to a state where the opening degree is larger than the fully opened state. For example, the configuration is such that the rotation stopper 365 is not provided.

  (B4) In the first embodiment, the lower plate passage hole 344 is opened and closed by the rotation of the regulating member 363. However, the regulating member 363 opens and closes the lower plate passage hole 344 by sliding. You may. For example, the configuration is such that the regulating member 363 is provided in a state of being overlapped on the side surface portion of the vertical passage portion 285 (the vertical portion 342b of the lower plate passage partition portion 342). In this configuration, the regulating member 363 slides in a direction in which the overlap with the vertical portion 342b decreases, thereby closing the lower plate passage hole 344, and slides in a direction in which the overlap with the vertical portion 342b increases. The lower plate passage hole 344 can be opened. Also in this configuration, if the regulating member 363 has an extending portion extending toward the inside of the vertical passage portion 285, the regulating member 363 is opened by being pushed by the flowing game ball. From the closed state to the closed state.

  The regulating member 363 may open and close the lower plate passage hole 344 by elastically deforming. For example, the regulating member 363 is made of an elastically deformable material such as rubber and provided in a fully opened state. In this configuration, when the regulating member 363 is pushed by the flowing game ball, the regulating member 363 is elastically deformed in a direction to decrease the opening degree to the lower plate passage hole 344, and the pressing is released by the passing of the game ball. Then, by returning to the original shape, the state is shifted to the fully open state. In this configuration, since the regulating member 363 can shift to a state in which the degree of opening is larger than the fully opened state (partitioned state), even when the game balls are stacked in the front door side lower plate passage 273, the state can be reduced. It is possible to prevent the regulation member 363 from being damaged or clogged by a game ball.

  (B5) In the first embodiment, the regulating member 363 is provided rotatably in the front door side lower plate passage portion 273, but the regulating member 363 is provided rotatably in the sound passage 333. Is also good. For example, the lower plate passage hole 344 is opened even when the regulating member 363 in the closed state rotates toward either the front door side lower plate passage portion 273 side or the sound passage 333 side.

  (B6) In the first embodiment, when the sound restriction effect is performed, the regulating member 363 is shifted to the closed state, but the volume of the sound emitted from the front door side lower plate passage 273 is reduced. If restricted, the opening degree of the regulating member 363 with respect to the lower plate passage hole 344 may be merely reduced. In this case, the opening degree of the regulating member 363 may be smaller than when the sound restriction effect is not performed.

  (B7) In the first embodiment, the sound restriction effect can be executed when the variation display mode on the symbol display device 75 is any of the super reach A to C. In the case where the sound is limited or the sound is completely off, the sound restriction effect may be executable. In any case, the player's expectation of the stop result of the variable display can be increased.

  (B8) In the first embodiment, the sound limit effect is started at the timing when the super reach effect is started. However, the sound limit effect is started after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the super reach effect. It may be configured to be started. Thereby, the degree of expectation of the player can be increased, and the variation of the sound restriction effect can be increased.

  (B9) In the first embodiment, when the game is being played, that is, when the symbol display is being performed on the symbol display device 75, the sound restriction effect can be executed. When the symbol variation display is not performed, the sound restriction effect may be executable. For example, when the winning / rejecting lottery mode is in the high probability mode, the sound restriction effect may be executable. In any case, the state in which the possibility that the privilege is given to the player is high and the state in which the privilege is not high is differentiated by the sound restriction effect, so that the expectation degree of the privilege provision can be increased by the sound restriction effect.

  (B10) In the first embodiment, the regulating member 363 is forcibly shifted to the closed state when the lower plate is full, in the open / close execution mode, or when performing the sound restriction effect. In addition, when a fraud is detected by the fraud detection process (step S202), or when the standby display is performed on the symbol display device 75 by the demo display process (step S217), the regulating member 363 is activated. It may be forcibly shifted to the closed state.

  (B11) In the first embodiment, the sound output from the rear side of the lower speaker 30a is taken into the front door side lower plate passage 273, but the front side of the lower speaker 30a is used instead of the rear side. The sound output from the side may be taken into the front door side lower plate passage portion 273. For example, in the front door side passage unit 45, the speaker chamber 336 is provided in the rear base plate 274b, so that the air chamber 332 is opened toward the rear of the pachinko machine. In this configuration, the air chamber 332 is not opened toward the front of the pachinko machine, and the front portion of the lower speaker 30a enters the air chamber 332 through the speaker opening 336. In this case, the output sound from the front side of the lower speaker 30a is emitted toward the lower plate 34 through the lower door passage portion 273 on the front door side.

  (C1) In the first embodiment, the rotation shaft portion of the regulating member 363 as a partition is provided at the upper end of the lower plate passage hole 344. However, the regulating member 363 is provided in the lower plate passage hole. It may be arranged at a position away from the 344 on the upstream side. For example, when the regulating member 363 is in the partition state, the upper horizontal passage portion 284 is arranged at an intermediate position between the upper horizontal passage portion 284 and the upstream horizontal passage portion 284.

  (C2) In the first embodiment, the rotation distal end of the regulating member 363 in the partitioned state is configured to be hooked on the rotating stopper 365. However, the rotating base end of the regulating member 363 in the partitioned state. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which the side end portion and the intermediate portion are hooked on the rotation stopper 365. Further, the rotation stopper 365 may not be provided on the outer peripheral portion of the lower door passage 273 on the front door side, but may be provided on the regulating member 363 or a rotating shaft of the regulating member 363. Further, the regulating member 363 may be held in a partitioned state by being hooked on the inner peripheral surface of the front door side passage forming portion 276.

  (C3) In the first embodiment, the regulation member 363 is held in the partitioned state by being hooked on the rotation stopper 365. However, the regulation drive unit 366 regulates the rotation of the regulation member 363. , The regulating member 363 may be held in a partitioned state.

  (C4) In the first embodiment, when the gaming state is in the open / close execution mode, the regulating member 363 is forcibly shifted to the closed state. However, when in the high-frequency support mode, the regulating member 363 is closed. The state may be forcibly shifted. Further, even in the open / close execution mode, a configuration is adopted in which the regulating member 363 is shifted to the closed state if the jackpot has been won for the probable jackpot, and the regulating member 363 is not shifted to the closed state if the jackpot is normally won. Is also good.

  (D1) In the first embodiment, the lower plate passage hole 344 extends downward from the horizontal portion 342a in the vertical portion 342b of the lower plate passage partitioning part 342. It may be disposed at a position spaced downward from the portion 342a. Even in this case, the lower dish passage hole 344 can be arranged at a position separated from the flow-down path of the game ball.

  (D2) In the first embodiment, in the vertical passage portion 285, the lower plate passage hole 344 is disposed in the vertical portion 342b of the side surface of the vertical passage portion 285 on the upper horizontal passage portion 284 side. The dish passage hole 344 may be arranged on a side surface of the vertical passage 285 opposite to the upper horizontal passage 284 or on a side arranged before and after the vertical passage 285. Even in this case, it is possible to dispose the lower plate passage hole 344 at a position separated from the flow path of the game ball.

  (D3) In the first embodiment, the lower dish passage hole 344 has a size and a shape capable of passing game balls. However, the lower dish passage hole 344 has a size and a shape that does not allow game balls to pass. May be provided. Examples of the lower plate passage hole 344 include a long hole extending along the flowing direction of the game ball, a long hole extending in the thickness direction of the front door side lower plate passage portion 273, and the like.

  (D4) In the first embodiment, the regulating member 363 has a function of blocking transmission of sound in the air. However, when the regulating member 363 is in the closed state, a game from the lower plate passage hole 344 is performed. As long as it regulates outflow of the sphere, it is not necessary to have a function of blocking transmission of sound in the air. For example, the regulating member 363 of the first embodiment may have a net 467 as a dividing unit like the regulating member 465 of the fourth embodiment.

  (D5) In the fourth embodiment, the regulating member 465 has the mesh portion 467 as a dividing unit that divides the lower plate passage hole 344 into a plurality of parts. However, the regulating member 465 may be a bar member or a lattice member. You may have division means. For example, the regulating member 465 has a bar member for vertically dividing the lower plate passage hole 344, and the bar member is fixed to the frame 466. In this configuration, by dividing the lower plate passage hole 344 into a size and a shape that the game ball cannot pass through, the outflow of the game ball from the lower plate passage hole 344 is restricted, while the lower plate passage hole 344 is prevented from flowing out. The sound is captured.

  Note that if the mesh of the net portion 467 is very rough or if the rod member that partitions the lower plate passage hole 344 is very thin, it is assumed that the influence of these dividing means on sound transmission is extremely small. For this reason, in the first embodiment, the regulating member 363 is provided in a state where the lower plate passage hole 344 cannot be opened, and the dividing means is provided for the lower plate passage hole 344 present at an intermediate position of the horn area 371. However, in the horn region 371, it is possible to maintain the easiness of amplification in the low frequency range and the easiness of attenuation in the middle and high frequency range.

  (D6) In the first embodiment, the fullness detection sensor 280 is provided for the lower horizontal passage portion 286. However, if the fullness detection sensor 280 is located downstream of the lower plate passage hole 344, the It may be provided for the plate 34, the first ball inlet 34a, and the vertical passage 285. Further, in the configuration in which the lower plate passage hole 344 is provided for the upper horizontal passage portion 284, if the fullness detection sensor 280 is located at a position downstream of the lower plate passage hole 344, It may be provided.

  (E1) In the above embodiments, the lower plate passage hole 344 is provided for the front door side lower plate passage portion 273 in the lower plate passage, but the lower plate passage hole 344 is provided in the inner frame side lower plate passage. It may be provided for the portion 263 and the back-pack-side lower plate passage 259.

  (E2) In the above embodiments, two ball trays, the upper plate 33 and the lower plate 34, are provided, but one ball tray may be provided. For example, an intake hole is provided in a ball passage connected to the ball tray, and the output sound of the lower speaker 30a is taken into the ball passage from the intake hole. Also in this configuration, the output sound of the lower speaker 30a is emitted forward from the ball passage.

  (E3) In the above embodiments, the output sound of the lower speaker 30a is emitted from the lower plate passage (the front door side lower plate passage portion 273). The passage 242 and the discharge passage of the discharge passage board 203 may be configured to be discharged. For example, in the upper plate passage, a sound intake hole is provided on the outer peripheral portion of the front door side upper plate passage portion 272, and the output sound of the lower speaker 30a is taken into the front door side upper plate passage portion 272 through the sound intake hole, The taken-in sound is emitted from the front door side upper plate passage portion 272 toward the upper plate 33.

  (E4) Another type of pachinko machine different from the above-described embodiment, such as a pachinko machine in which the electric accessory opens a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific region of the special device, or a game ball in a specific region of the special device The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine that becomes a jackpot when a right is entered and a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine equipped with another accessory, an arrangement ball machine, a sparrow ball, and the like.

  Furthermore, the game machine main body supported to be openable and closable on the outer frame includes a storage unit and a capture device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are captured by the capture device. Accordingly, the present invention can be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, in which the rotation of a reel is started.

<About the invention group extracted from the above embodiment>
Hereinafter, features of the invention group extracted from the above-described embodiment will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for easy understanding, the corresponding configuration in the above-described embodiment is appropriately shown in parentheses and the like, but is not limited to the specific configuration shown in parentheses and the like.

<Characteristic A group>
The invention of the following feature group A is effective for the following problems.

  A gaming machine such as a pachinko machine is provided with a speaker capable of outputting a sound such as a sound effect (for example, see JP-A-2005-261808). In a gaming machine, sound output from a speaker is emitted toward the front of the gaming machine.

  However, there is still room for improvement in the configuration in which the sound output from the sound output means such as a speaker is emitted to the front of the gaming machine.

Feature A1. A ball tray (lower plate 34) provided in a state exposed to the front of the gaming machine and storing game balls,
A ball passage (a back-pack-side lower plate passage 259, an inner frame-side lower plate passage 263, a front door-side lower plate passage 273, and a first ball inlet 34a) for discharging game balls to the ball tray;
A speaker (lower speaker 30a) having a diaphragm (diaphragm 30b) and outputting sound in accordance with the vibration of the diaphragm;
An enclosure (enclosure 331) for emitting sound output from the rear side of the speaker to the front of the gaming machine;
With
The enclosure has an air chamber (air chamber 332) that houses the rear side of the speaker,
A sound take-in hole (lower plate passage hole 344) is provided at an outer peripheral portion of the ball passage to take in a sound output from the rear side of the speaker to the air chamber into the ball passage.
The ball passage is included in the enclosure by being communicated with the air chamber through the sound intake hole, and directs sound taken into the ball passage from the sound intake hole toward the ball tray. A gaming machine characterized by emitting.

  According to the feature A1, since the speaker has the specific diaphragm, when sound is output from the speaker, the outer peripheral portion of the ball passage does not need to function as an external diaphragm. Therefore, even if the sound is emitted to the front of the gaming machine through the ball passage, the vibration of the diaphragm of the speaker is not hindered by the game balls existing in the ball passage. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the sound quality of the sound emitted to the front of the gaming machine through the ball passage from being deteriorated due to the presence of the gaming ball.

  Here, in a speaker having a diaphragm, the output sound from the back side has a phase inverted with respect to the output sound from the front side. It is feared that will be reduced. On the other hand, according to this feature, since the ball passage is included in the enclosure, the output sound from the rear side of the speaker is emitted to the front of the gaming machine through the ball passage, so that the sound is output from the front side. Deviates from the inverted phase for the output sound. For this reason, it is difficult for the sounds output before and after the speaker to cancel each other, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the output capability of the speaker, such as a decrease in the volume of a low-frequency range.

  Further, in a configuration in which the rear side of the speaker is housed in the air chamber, there is a concern that the size of the enclosure including the air chamber may be increased. On the other hand, according to this feature, since the enclosure is configured to include the spherical passage, the size of the enclosure can be reduced as compared to a configuration in which all of the enclosure is formed by the dedicated space. As a result, the enclosure can be properly arranged in a narrow space inside the gaming machine.

  As described above, it is possible to provide a configuration suitable for emitting the sound output from the speaker to the front of the gaming machine.

  Since the sound output from the speaker is emitted from the ball passage, when the ball tray is full of game balls, the ball is closed by the game balls, and sound is hardly emitted from the ball passage. turn into. Here, since the sound is one element for the player to enjoy the game, if the sound is hard to be heard due to the full ball tray, the player can hear the sound to play the game. It is considered that the ball tray is released from the full state in order to enjoy the game. Therefore, emitting the sound from the ball passage also realizes a configuration that prompts the player to discharge the game ball from the ball tray.

  Feature A2. In the ball passage, a portion (a horn region 371) on the downstream side of a portion communicating with the air chamber has a horn shape which is generally thicker as approaching the ball tray from the air chamber. The gaming machine according to Feature A1.

  According to the feature A2, since the ball passage has a horn shape, the bass range of the sound passing through the ball passage is easily amplified. For this reason, with respect to the output sound from the rear side of the speaker, the volume of a low-tone range that tends to be insufficient at the time of output from the speaker can be increased by passing through the ball passage.

  Feature A3. The gaming machine according to Feature A2, wherein the downstream portion of the ball passage has a ball corner portion (an intermediate bent portion 304 and a downstream bent portion 305) that changes a flowing direction of a game ball. .

  According to the feature A3, in the ball passage, the velocity of the flowing game ball is easily reduced at the ball corner, and the middle and high range of the sound is easily attenuated by the sound passing through the ball corner. ing. For this reason, by utilizing a configuration for preventing the game balls from being discharged to the ball tray while maintaining excessive momentum, it is possible to make the bass range of the sound emitted from the ball passage stand out clearly. That is, in the speaker system, the function as a back load horn can be exhibited in the ball passage.

Feature A4. The spherical passage includes a plurality of linearly extending passage portions (an upper horizontal passage portion 284, a vertical passage portion 285, and a lower horizontal passage portion 286).
The game according to Feature A2, wherein the connection portion extending in different directions and connecting the adjacent passage portions is a ball corner portion (intermediate bend portion 304) that changes the flowing direction of the game ball. Machine.

  According to the feature A4, since the passage portion connected by the ball corner portion extends linearly, the game ball can be accelerated to some extent by the straight portion of the passage portion. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of clogging of the ball in the ball passage due to excessive restriction of the momentum of the game ball flowing down the ball passage.

  In addition, the presence of the spherical corner portion makes it easier to attenuate the mid-high range of the sound passing through the ball path, so that the low range of the sound emitted from the ball path can be clearly heard. That is, in the speaker system, the function as a back load horn can be exhibited in the ball passage.

Feature A5. The enclosure has a horn portion (horn region 371) that is made thicker as it approaches the ball tray from the air chamber as a whole.
The horn according to any one of features A1 to A4, wherein the horn has the ball passage and a sound passage (sound passage 333) connecting the ball passage and the air chamber. Gaming machine.

  When forming the horn portion in the enclosure, there is a concern that the length of the horn portion is insufficient with only the ball passage. On the other hand, according to the feature A5, since the horn portion is formed by the sound passage in addition to the ball passage, the length dimension of the horn portion is sufficiently secured by connecting the sound passage to the ball passage. be able to. In this case, since the low frequency range of the sound output from the rear side of the speaker is sufficiently amplified by the horn, the volume of the low frequency range, which tends to be insufficient with only the sound output from the front side of the speaker, is reduced by the horn. It can be supplemented by the output sound.

  Feature A6. The gaming machine according to Feature A5, wherein the sound passage has a sound corner portion (sound bending portion 357) that changes a direction in which sound is transmitted.

  According to the feature A6, since the sound passage has the sound corner portion, the horn portion can function as a back load horn. In addition, since the sound path has a sound corner in the horn portion, the ball path does not necessarily have to have a ball corner. By including a ball passage in the vehicle, it is possible to avoid a decrease in the degree of freedom. Therefore, the back load horn can be appropriately formed by using the ball passage without affecting the flow down mode of the game ball in the ball passage.

  Feature A7. The horn section further includes an outflow regulation section (regulation member 363) that regulates a game ball from flowing out of the ball passage through the sound intake hole to the sound passage. The feature A5 or A6, wherein: Gaming machine.

  The horn has a function of amplifying the low frequency range of the sound by increasing the cross-sectional area as it approaches the ball tray from the air chamber, so the sound is captured at the connection between the sound passage and the ball passage. In the configuration in which the hole is formed, the opening area of the sound intake hole is set according to the cross-sectional area of the ball passage on the downstream side. In this case, since the ball passage is set to a size and a shape that allows a game ball to pass, the sound intake hole is also likely to be a size and a shape that allows the game ball to pass, and the sound passage is high. There is a concern that game balls may flow out.

  On the other hand, according to the feature A7, it is possible to prevent the game balls flowing down the ball passage from flowing out to the sound passage and not being properly discharged to the ball tray. In addition, it is possible to prevent the game passage from being clogged with the sound passage or the air chamber and sound not being properly emitted from the horn portion.

  Feature A8. The outflow regulating portion regulates the outflow of the game ball to the sound passage from a non-regulated state in which the outflow of the game ball to the sound passage is not regulated by being pressed by the game ball flowing down the ball passage. The gaming machine according to feature A7, wherein the gaming machine shifts to a restricted state.

  According to the feature A8, when the flowing game ball approaches the sound take-in hole, the outflow restricting portion shifts to the regulated state by being pressed by the game ball, so that the outflow of the game ball to the sound passage is prevented. Can be regulated reliably. Here, when the outflow of the game ball to the sound passage is regulated by the outflow regulation unit, there is a concern that the outflow regulation unit also regulates transmission of sound from the sound passage to the ball passage. On the other hand, according to this feature, when the flowing game ball is not approaching the sound intake hole, the outflow restriction portion can be held in the non-restricted state, so that the ball can be moved from the sound passage. There is no need to regulate the transmission of sound to the aisle. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately perform both emission of the sound from the ball passage and ejection of the game ball.

  Feature A9. The gaming machine according to Feature A8, wherein the outflow restriction unit returns from the restricted state to the non-restricted state when the game ball passes and the pressing is released.

  According to the feature A9, when the game ball passes around the sound intake hole in the ball passage, the outflow regulating portion is in the regulation state only for a very short period, so that the period in which the sound passage from the sound passage to the ball passage is interrupted. It can be very short. Therefore, even if the outflow of the game ball to the sound passage is restricted, it is possible to suppress the effect of the sound emitted from the ball passage from being significantly reduced.

  In addition, as a configuration in which the outflow regulating portion returns from the regulated state to the unregulated state, the outflow regulating portion is elastically deformed in accordance with the transition from the unregulated state to the regulated state, and is caused by the elastic deformation A configuration including an urging member that returns the outflow regulating portion from the regulated state to the unregulated state by an urging force, or a configuration in which the outflow regulating portion returns from the regulated state to the unregulated state by the weight of the outflow regulating portion. Is mentioned.

  Feature A10. The feature A8 or A9, wherein the outflow restricting portion is in a partitioning state in which the ball passage is partitioned into an upstream side and a downstream side as the non-regulating state when the ball is not pressed by the flowing game ball. A gaming machine according to claim 1.

  According to the feature A10, since the outflow restriction unit in the non-restricted state exists on the downflow path of the game ball in the ball passage, the game ball flowing down the ball passage changes the outflow restriction unit from the unrestricted state to the restricted state. Can be realized.

  Further, if the outflow regulating portion is formed of a member such as a plate member that regulates transmission of sound, the outflow regulating portion, when in the non-regulated state, allows sound taken into the ball passage through the sound intake hole to flow downstream. While the sound is not restricted to be transmitted to the side (ball tray), the sound is restricted to be transmitted to the upstream side (opposite to the ball tray). In this case, since the sound transmitted to the ball passage through the sound intake hole is suppressed from being diffused toward the upstream side of the ball passage, the game transmission from the ball passage is not compared with the configuration in which the transmission of the sound to the upstream side is not restricted. The sound emitted to the front of the aircraft can be increased.

Feature A11. A gaming machine body (inner frame 13) having the gaming board,
A game machine front body (front door frame 14) having the ball tray and provided rotatably in front of the game machine with respect to the game machine body;
With
The ball passage has a front passage portion (front door side lower plate passage portion 273) provided on the gaming machine front body and communicating with the ball tray.
The gaming machine front body according to any one of features A1 to A10, wherein the gaming machine front body has a passage unit (front door side passage unit 45) forming the air chamber and the front passage section. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature A11, the front passage portion and the air chamber are integrated with each other to form a passage unit, so that the front passage portion and the air chamber are individually mounted on the game machine front body. There is no need to perform complicated work Further, by manufacturing the passage unit in advance, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of sound leakage between the front passage portion and the air chamber.

Feature A12. The gaming machine front body has a base body (base frame 231) to which the speaker and the passage unit are attached,
The passage unit has a speaker opening (speaker opening 336) that opens the air chamber toward the speaker, and accommodates a rear portion of the speaker in the air chamber through the speaker opening. The gaming machine according to feature A11, wherein the gaming machine is attached to a back surface of the base body in a state in which the gaming machine has been turned off.

  According to the feature A12, since the speaker opening is formed in the passage unit, it is possible to attach the speaker in advance to the base body of the gaming machine front body, and then attach the passage unit to the base body. Become. That is, the passage unit and the speaker can be separately attached to the base body.

  Here, since the sound is output in accordance with the vibration of the diaphragm in the speaker, it is preferable that the speaker is firmly attached to the front face of the gaming machine so that the fixed state is not unstable due to the vibration. On the other hand, by separately attaching the passage unit and the speaker to the base body, the speaker can be directly fixed to the base body instead of being fixed to the base body via the passage unit. In addition, the strength of fixing the speaker to the base body can be sufficiently ensured.

  Feature A13. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A12, wherein the air chamber is disposed at a position that does not overlap with the ball passage in the longitudinal direction of the gaming machine.

  According to the feature A13, since the air chamber is arranged at a position that does not overlap the ball passage in the front-rear direction of the gaming machine, by installing a speaker system in the gaming machine, the thickness dimension of the gaming machine becomes excessively large. Can be suppressed. In addition, after realizing a configuration that improves sound quality with the enclosure, the side position, upper position, and lower position of the ball passage in the width direction of the gaming machine are not used as dead spaces, but are effectively used as installation space for air chambers can do.

  Feature A14. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A13, wherein the sound intake hole is provided at an outer peripheral portion of the ball passage at a position separated from a flow-down path of the game ball.

  In the configuration in which the sound intake hole is formed in the outer peripheral portion of the ball passage, the game ball passing through the ball passage flows out from the sound intake hole to the air chamber side, and the sound intake hole becomes a factor inhibiting the flow of the game ball. It is concerned. On the other hand, according to the feature A14, since the sound intake hole is separated from the flow path of the game ball, the sound intake hole impedes the flow of the game ball, and the game ball flows out of the ball passage. Can be suppressed. In addition, since the sound intake hole is separated from the flow path of the game ball, the sound intake hole is less likely to be blocked by the flowing game ball. The sound output from the ball is properly taken into the ball passage through the sound taking hole. Therefore, it is possible to realize a configuration in which both the game ball and the sound are properly released from the ball passage to the ball tray.

Feature A15. The ball passage has a horizontal passage portion (upper horizontal passage portion 284, lower horizontal passage portion 286) extending in the width direction or the depth direction of the gaming machine,
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A14, wherein the air chamber is disposed below the lateral passage portion.

  In a configuration in which the ball passage has a lateral passage portion, the game balls not introduced into the ball passage can be guided to a predetermined position by flowing down along the upper surface of the outer peripheral portion of the ball passage. That is, the space above the ball passage can be effectively used as a collection space for game balls.

  On the other hand, according to the feature A15, the space below the lateral passage portion can be effectively used as an installation space for the air chamber. Thus, in a limited space inside the gaming machine, a speaker system can be suitably constructed without restricting other functions relating to the ball passage.

Feature A16. The ball passage,
A vertical passage portion (vertical passage portion 285) disposed downstream of the horizontal passage portion and extending downward from a downstream end of the horizontal passage portion;
The gaming machine according to Feature A15, wherein the sound intake hole is provided in a side portion of the vertical passage portion (a vertical portion 342b of the lower plate passage partition portion 342) below the horizontal passage portion.

  In the configuration where the air chamber and the ball passage communicate with each other through the sound intake hole, game balls passing through the ball passage may flow out of the sound intake hole toward the air chamber, and the sound intake hole may inhibit the flow of the game ball. Is concerned about In particular, in a configuration in which the air chamber is arranged below the lateral passage, it is assumed that a sound intake hole is formed in the lower surface of the lateral passage. There is a concern that the sound intake hole may flow out of the hole to the air chamber side, or that the sound intake hole may block the flow of the game ball in the lateral passage.

  On the other hand, according to the feature A16, since the sound take-in hole is arranged at the side corner of the vertical passage and the horizontal passage in the side surface of the vertical passage, the horizontal passage is formed. The passing game balls flow down the vertical passage while moving to the side away from the sound intake hole. In this case, since it is difficult for the game ball to pass over the sound intake hole or to flow down toward the sound intake hole, the game ball flowing down the vertical passage portion is moved from the sound intake hole to the air chamber side. It is possible to prevent the sound capturing hole from flowing out and obstructing the flow of the game ball in the vertical passage portion.

  Feature A17. The feature A16 is characterized in that the sound intake hole extends downward from a floor portion of the horizontal passage portion (horizontal portion 342a of the lower plate passage partition portion 342) on a side surface portion of the vertical passage portion. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature A17, the sound intake hole can be arranged directly below the horizontal passage portion in the vertical passage portion, so that the game sphere flowing down from the horizontal passage portion toward the vertical passage portion more reliably contacts the sound intake hole. Can be suppressed. Therefore, even if the sound intake hole is formed in the vertical passage portion, it is possible to realize a configuration in which the game ball is properly discharged to the ball tray regardless of the sound intake hole.

Feature A18. A game board (game board 60a) in which a game area in which a game ball flows down is formed,
Game ball launching means (game ball launch mechanism 110) for launching game balls based on the launch device;
A guide rail (guide rail 100) provided on the game board, for guiding a game ball fired from the game ball firing means toward the game area;
A collection port (collection port 281a) for collecting game balls flowing backward on the guide rail toward the game ball launching means, and a collection passage (foul) for guiding the collected game balls toward the ball tray; Ball passage 118),
With
The gaming machine according to any one of features A15 to A17, wherein the collection passage is provided above the horizontal passage portion so as to extend along the horizontal passage portion.

  According to the feature A18, in the configuration in which the space above the lateral passage is used as a space for collecting the foul sphere flowing backward from the game area, the air chamber is arranged below the lateral passage, so that the speaker system is used. By setting the air chamber, it is possible to prevent the arrangement of the collection passage from being restricted or the function of the collection passage from being reduced.

Feature A19. A game machine body (inner frame 13) having a game board (game board 60a);
A game machine front body (front door frame 14) having the ball tray and provided rotatably in front of the game machine with respect to the game machine body;
With
The ball passage,
A first passage portion (front door side lower plate passage portion 273) which is provided on the gaming machine front body and guides game balls received at an entrance (outer opening 279) to the ball tray;
A second passage portion (a back pack side lower plate passage portion 259, an inner frame side lower plate passage portion 263) which constitutes an upstream side of the first passage portion and guides game balls to the entrance portion;
Has,
The ball receiving passageway (ball receiving passage 289) for receiving game balls overflowing from the entrance portion with the opening of the game machine front body with respect to the game machine body and guiding the received game balls to the collection port is provided in the horizontal direction. The gaming machine according to any one of features A15 to A18, wherein the gaming machine is provided above the horizontal passage portion so as to extend along the passage portion.

  According to the feature A19, since the space above the lateral passage is used as a space for collecting overflow balls overflowing from the entrance of the first passage, the air chamber is arranged below the lateral passage. Thus, it is possible to prevent the air chamber from restricting the arrangement of the collecting passage and the ball receiving passage, and from reducing the functions of the collecting passage and the ball receiving passage.

  Feature A20. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A19, wherein the air chamber is disposed above the ball passage.

  According to the feature A20, the space above the ball passage can be effectively used as an installation space for the air chamber.

  Feature A21. The gaming machine according to Feature A20, wherein the sound intake hole is provided in a ceiling portion of the ball passage (a vertical passage portion 452b of the lower plate passage partition portion 452).

  According to the feature A21, since the sound intake hole is formed in the upper surface portion of the horizontal passage portion, in the horizontal passage portion, it is difficult for the flowing game balls to contact the sound intake hole itself. . For this reason, it is possible to suppress the game balls flowing down the horizontal passage from flowing out of the sound intake hole toward the air chamber, and to prevent the sound intake holes from blocking the flow of the game balls in the horizontal passage.

  Feature A22. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A21, wherein a plurality of the sound intake holes are provided as small holes that do not allow a game ball to pass through.

  According to the feature A22, since the game ball cannot pass through the small sound intake hole, the outflow of the game ball from the ball passage can be suppressed. In addition, since the output sound from the rear side of the speaker passes through the plurality of small holes, the mid-high range of the sound is easily attenuated, so that the low range of the sound emitted from the ball passage is clearly heard. You can do so. For this reason, it is possible to enhance the effect of the bass sound by using a configuration for preventing the game balls from flowing out of the ball passage.

Feature A23. The ball passage includes a horizontal passage portion (upper horizontal passage portion 284) extending in the width direction or the depth direction of the gaming machine, and a vertical passage portion (vertical passage portion 285) connected to the horizontal passage portion and extending vertically. Have
A plurality of the sound intake holes are provided on each of the outer peripheral portions of the horizontal passage portion and the vertical passage portion as small holes that do not allow a game ball to pass therethrough, any one of features A1 to A22. The gaming machine described in one.

  According to the feature A23, since the game ball cannot pass through the small sound intake hole, the outflow of the game ball from the ball passage can be suppressed. In addition, since the output sound from the rear side of the speaker passes through the plurality of small holes, the mid-high range of the sound is easily attenuated, so that the low range of the sound emitted from the ball passage is clearly heard. You can do so. For this reason, it is possible to enhance the effect of the bass sound by using a configuration for preventing the game balls from flowing out of the ball passage.

  Furthermore, since the direction of sound transmission from the air chamber is different between the horizontal passage portion and the vertical passage portion, it is possible to create an environment in which the low range of the sound is easily amplified and the middle and high range is easily attenuated. This makes it possible to further enhance the effect of the bass sound.

<Characteristic B group>
The invention of the following feature group B is effective for the following problems.

  A gaming machine such as a pachinko machine is provided with a speaker capable of outputting a sound such as a sound effect (for example, see JP-A-2005-261808). In a gaming machine, sound output from a speaker is emitted toward the front of the gaming machine.

  However, there is still room for improvement in the configuration in which the sound output from the sound output means such as a speaker is emitted to the front of the gaming machine.

Feature B1. A ball tray (lower plate 34) provided in a state exposed to the front of the gaming machine and storing game balls,
A ball passage (front door side lower plate passage portion 273) for discharging game balls to the ball tray,
A speaker (lower speaker 30a) having a diaphragm (diaphragm 30b) and outputting sound in accordance with the vibration of the diaphragm;
A sound intake hole (lower plate passage hole 344) provided on an outer peripheral portion of the ball passage (the vertical portion 342b of the lower plate passage partitioning portion 342) to take sound output from the speaker into the ball passage;
An opening / closing body (restriction member 363) for opening and closing the sound intake hole;
With
The gaming machine, wherein the opening / closing body restricts the output sound from the speaker from being taken into the ball passage through the sound intake hole according to an opening degree to the sound intake hole.

  According to the feature B1, since the speaker has the specific diaphragm, when sound is output from the speaker, the outer peripheral portion of the ball passage does not need to function as an external diaphragm. Therefore, simply closing the sound intake hole by the opening / closing body stops emission of sound from the ball passage. In this case, the emission of sound from the ball passage can be stopped without stopping the output of sound from the speaker. With such a configuration, the sound emission from the ball passage can be stopped while the sound emission from the other sound emission units is continued.

  As described above, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom regarding the mode in which the output sound from the speaker is emitted to the outside of the gaming machine. That is, it is possible to provide a configuration suitable for emitting the sound output from the speaker to the front of the gaming machine.

  In addition, when the sound intake hole is closed by the opening and closing body, even if it is not possible to block transmission of all sounds by the opening and closing body, the opening and closing state of the opening and closing state is different from the ball passage. Differences can be made in the volume of the emitted sound. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom regarding the mode in which the output sound from the speaker is emitted to the outside of the gaming machine.

  Feature B2. The gaming machine according to Feature B1, wherein the opening / closing body performs a closing operation of reducing the opening degree by being pressed by a game ball flowing down the ball passage.

  According to the feature B2, when the flowing game ball presses the opening / closing body, the opening / closing body closes to restrict transmission of the output sound from the speaker to the ball passage. For this reason, even if the opening / closing body is not forcibly closed by a driving unit such as a motor, the emission of sound from the ball passage can be limited. In this way, by using the flow of the game ball, the degree of freedom regarding the mode of sound emission to the outside of the game machine can be increased.

  Further, the player can detect that the game ball is being discharged to the ball tray through the ball passage by interrupting the sound emitted from the ball passage.

  Feature B3. The gaming machine according to Feature B2, wherein the opening / closing body performs an opening operation to increase the opening degree when a game ball passes and the pressing is released.

  According to the feature B3, in the configuration in which the flowing game ball closes the opening / closing body, the opening / closing body performs the opening operation after the passing of the game ball, so that the emission of sound from the ball passage is restricted by the opening / closing body. The period of time is extremely short. In this case, when a plurality of game balls flow down the ball passage, the sound emitted from the ball passage is instantaneously interrupted, so that the game machine is set in accordance with the payout mode of the game balls to the ball tray. The manner in which sound is emitted to the outside will change. For this reason, the effect produced by the sound emitted from the ball passage can be enhanced.

  Further, the player can detect the number of game balls to be paid out to the ball tray from the sound interruption without having to visually recognize the ball tray.

  In addition, as the configuration in which the opening of the sound capturing hole is increased by releasing the pressing of the opening / closing body through a game ball, the opening / closing body is elastically deformed as the opening degree of the opening / closing body decreases, A configuration including an urging member that increases the opening degree of the opening / closing body by an urging force generated by the elastic deformation, or a configuration in which the outflow restricting unit returns from the restricted state to the unregulated state by the weight of the outflow restricting unit. No.

  Feature B4. The opening / closing body is configured to open and close the sound capturing hole by rotating, and when the opening / closing body is open toward the ball passage side, the opening / closing body is pressed by a game ball flowing down the ball passage. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B3, wherein a closing operation for reducing the degree of opening can be performed with the button.

  According to the feature B4, it is possible to realize a configuration in which the opening / closing body closes when the flowing game ball presses the opening / closing body by simply providing the opening / closing body to be rotatable. Thus, by using the flow of the gaming ball, the degree of freedom regarding the sound emission mode to the outside of the gaming machine can be increased.

  Feature B5. The opening / closing body is characterized in that, when not pressed by a game ball, the open state is a partition state in which the ball passage is partitioned into an upstream side and a downstream side on the upstream side of the sound intake hole. The gaming machine according to Feature B4.

  According to the feature B5, when the opening / closing body is in the partition state, the game ball flowing down the ball passage presses the opening / closing body toward the downstream side. Therefore, it is possible to reliably change the sound emission mode from the ball passage in accordance with the flow of the game ball. In addition, when the opening / closing body is in a partitioned state, since the sound taken into the ball passage through the sound intake hole is transmitted to the upstream side by the opening / closing body, the transmission of the sound to the upstream side is not restricted. The sound emitted from the ball passage can be made louder than in the case of.

Feature B6. A drive unit (regulation drive unit 366) for opening and closing the opening / closing body;
Control means (the sub-MPU 432 of the notification / effect control device 143) for controlling the drive of the drive unit to shift the open / close body between the closed state and the open state;
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B5, comprising:

  According to the feature B6, the control means forcibly shifts the opening / closing body to the closed state, so that the emission of sound from the ball passage can be stopped at an arbitrary timing without stopping the driving of the speaker. become. In this case, the state in which sound emission from the ball passage is stopped (opening / closing body closed) and the state in which sound emission from the ball passage is not stopped (opening / closing body open) can be appropriately used. Since it becomes possible, it is possible to diversify the effect of the sound emitted from the ball passage.

Feature B7. The control means includes:
Effect determination means (a function of executing the processing of steps S805 and S806) for determining whether or not to perform a sound-restricting effect for restricting sound emission to the outside of the gaming machine;
A closing execution unit (a function of executing the processing of steps S803 and S807) for holding the open / close body in a closed state for a predetermined period when the effect determination unit determines that the sound restriction effect is to be performed;
The gaming machine according to feature B6, comprising:

  According to the feature B7, if the state in which sound is emitted from the ball passage is an ordinary performance, the state in which sound emission from the ball passage is stopped is used as one of the effects (sound limiting effect). be able to. Moreover, since it is possible to both start the sound-restricted production at an arbitrary timing and to end the sound-restricted production at an arbitrary timing, the opening / closing timing of the opening / closing body is set so that the sound-restricted production is emphasized. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the effect by utilizing the emission and stop of the sound from the ball passage.

Feature B8. A picture display device (symbol display device 75) for performing variable display of a plurality of kinds of pictures,
When the variation start condition of the plurality of patterns is satisfied, the variation display of the plurality of patterns is started, the variation display is performed according to a preset variation mode, and then the pattern display device is configured to display a stop result. Display control means (display control device 170) for controlling display of
With
The effect determination means, winning the lottery for performing the sound restriction effect, and when the fluctuation display is performed on the pattern display device, determines that the sound restriction effect is performed,
The gaming machine according to Feature B7, wherein the closing execution means holds the opening / closing body in the closed state when the variable display is being performed on the picture display device.

  According to the feature B8, in a situation in which the variation display of the picture is performed, a period in which the sound emission from the ball passage is restricted and a period in which the sound emission from the ball passage is not restricted are mixed. Depending on whether sound emission is restricted or not, it is possible to cause a difference in the degree of expectation for the variable display of the picture. In this way, the effect of effect in a situation where the pattern is displayed in a variable manner can be enhanced by the sound-limited effect.

Feature B9. In the form of the variable display displayed on the pattern display device, the other patterns except for the final stop pattern among the patterns that are likely to be a combination of the patterns determined to provide the player with the privilege, A reach variation display for variably displaying the final stop pattern is included under the condition that the variation display is started and then stopped and displayed,
The effect determination means, when the reach fluctuation display is performed as the fluctuation display, determines that the sound-limited effect is to be performed,
The game according to Feature B8, wherein the closing execution unit holds the opening / closing body in the closed state when the reach display is performed as the change display on the picture display device. Machine.

  Since the reach fluctuation display has a higher degree of expectation for the stop result than other fluctuation displays, as in the feature B9, the fact that the sound restriction effect is performed in the situation where the reach fluctuation display is being performed depends on the sound. It is effective in increasing the production effect. Moreover, even in the case of the reach variation display in the same mode, the difference between the case where the sound restriction effect is performed and the case where the sound restriction effect is not performed is differentiated, so that the effect of the effect during the reach change display is further enhanced. Can be.

Feature B10. The modes of the reach variation display include a first reach variation display (normal reach A and B) and a second reach variation display (super reach A to C) having a variation display period longer than the first reach variation display. And
The effect determination means, when the second reach variation display is performed as the reach variation display, determines to perform the sound restriction effect,
The feature B9 is characterized in that the closing execution means holds the opening / closing body in the closed state when the second reach variation display is being performed as the reach variation display on the picture display device. The gaming machine described.

  Since the second reach fluctuation display has a higher degree of expectation for the stop result than the first reach fluctuation display, the sound limit effect is performed when the second reach fluctuation display is performed as in the feature B10. This is effective in enhancing the sound effect. In addition, even in the case of the second reach variation display in the same mode, the sound effect is differentiated between when the sound limit effect is performed and when it is not performed. Can be further increased.

<Characteristic C group>
The invention of the following feature group C is effective for the following problems.

  A gaming machine such as a pachinko machine is provided with a speaker capable of outputting a sound such as a sound effect (for example, see JP-A-2005-261808). In a gaming machine, sound output from a speaker is emitted toward the front of the gaming machine.

  However, there is still room for improvement in the configuration in which the sound output from the sound output means such as a speaker is emitted to the front of the gaming machine.

Feature C1. A ball tray (lower plate 34) provided in a state exposed to the front of the gaming machine and storing game balls,
A ball passage (front door side lower plate passage portion 273) for discharging game balls to the ball tray,
A speaker (lower speaker 30a) having a diaphragm (diaphragm 30b) and outputting sound in accordance with the vibration of the diaphragm;
A sound intake hole (lower plate passage hole 344) provided on an outer peripheral portion of the ball passage (the vertical portion 342b of the lower plate passage partitioning portion 342) to take sound output from the speaker into the ball passage;
A partition member that can be shifted to a partition state in which the ball passage is partitioned into an upstream side and a downstream side on the upstream side of the sound intake hole, and a flow permission state in which the game balls are allowed to flow by releasing the partition. (Regulating member 363, partition member 461),
A gaming machine comprising:

  According to the feature C1, the speaker has the specific diaphragm, so that when sound is output from the speaker, the outer peripheral portion of the ball passage does not need to function as an external diaphragm. For this reason, by simply dividing the ball passage into an upstream side and a downstream side by a partition body, the sound taken into the ball passage from the sound intake hole is restricted from being transmitted to the opposite side (upstream side) of the ball tray. it can. Therefore, when the partition body is in the partition state, the emission efficiency when the output sound from the speaker is emitted through the ball passage can be increased.

  Here, in a gaming machine in which game balls are dispensed from a ball passage to a ball tray, when an illegal jig such as a wire is inserted into the ball passage, the dispensing device or the like is operated by the illegal jig and the game ball is operated. There is a concern that will be paid fraudulently. On the other hand, when the partition body is in the partition state, it is possible to restrict the illegal jig from entering the upstream side of the ball passage by the partition body. For this reason, when the timing of the flow of the game ball is adjusted, the partitioning body that can increase the sound emission efficiency from the ball passage exerts a deterrent on the illegal jig being inserted into the ball passage. Become.

  As described above, in the gaming machine in which the output sound from the speaker is emitted through the ball passage, the sound emission efficiency can be increased, and the gaming ball can be prevented from being illegally paid out. That is, it is possible to provide a configuration suitable for emitting the sound output from the speaker to the front of the gaming machine.

  When the partition is in the partition state, the flow of the game ball is regulated by the partition in addition to the transmission of the sound to the upstream side of the ball passage, so that the game ball cannot be discharged to the ball tray. On the other hand, since the partition body can be shifted to the downflow permission state, it becomes possible for the game ball to pass the partition position of the partition body. Thereby, while it is possible to restrict the output sound from the speaker from being diffused upstream in the ball passage, it is possible to properly discharge the game ball to the ball tray.

  Feature C2. The gaming machine according to Feature C1, wherein the partition body is shifted from the partition state to the downflow permission state by being pressed by a game ball flowing down the ball passage.

  When the partitioning body shifts from the partitioning state to the downflow permission state, it becomes possible for the game ball to pass through the partitioning position by the partitioning body, while an illegal jig inserted into the ball passage breaks through the partitioning position and reaches upstream. It is feared that it will invade the side.

  On the other hand, according to the feature C2, the partitioning body shifts from the partitioning state to the downflow permission state as the game ball passes through the partitioning position by the partitioning body. Unlike the configuration in which the game ball passes through the partition position after forcibly shifting the game ball to the flow permission state, no time lag occurs between the time when the partition body shifts to the flow permission state and the game ball passes through the partition position. It has become. For this reason, it is possible to suppress an improper act of intruding an illegal jig deep into a ball passage in accordance with the timing at which game balls flow down.

  Feature C3. The gaming machine according to Feature C2, wherein the partition body returns to the partition state from the downflow permission state when a game ball passes and the pressing is released.

  According to the feature C3, when the game ball passes around the sound intake hole in the ball passage, the partitioning member is allowed to flow down for a very short period of time, so even if an illegal jig is inserted into the ball passage. However, there is only a momentary timing for the jig to break through the partitioning position of the partitioning body. For this reason, it is possible to more reliably suppress an improper act of intruding an illegal jig deep into the ball passage in accordance with the timing at which the game ball flows down.

  In addition, as the configuration in which the partition body returns from the flow-down permission state to the partition state, the partition body is elastically deformed when the partition body shifts from the partition state to the flow-down permission state, and an irregular force generated by the elastic deformation is generated. A configuration including an urging member for returning the partition body from the flow-down permission state to the partition state, and a configuration in which the outflow restriction unit returns from the restriction state to the non-restriction state by the weight of the outflow restriction unit. .

  Feature C4. The partition body shifts from the partition state to the downflow permission state by rotating in a direction in which a rotation tip moves downstream, and when the partition state is in the partition state, the rotation tip is located upstream. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C3, wherein the gaming machine does not rotate in a direction in which the game machine moves.

  According to the feature C4, when the partition body is in the partition state, the partition body does not rotate toward the upstream side of the ball passage. Even if it is forcibly pushed open toward the upstream side, the illegal jig cannot break through the partition position by the partition body. Thereby, the deterrent to the intrusion of the illegal jig into the ball passage can be suitably exerted.

  Feature C5. A rotation stopper (rotation stopper 365) for restricting the partition body in the partition state from rotating toward the upstream side is provided at a position where the rotation stopper is hooked on a rotation tip portion of the partition body. The gaming machine according to Feature C4.

  According to the feature C5, since the turning tip of the partition body is caught by the turning stopper, even if the suspicious person forcibly deforms the turning tip side of the partition body with an unauthorized jig and forcibly opens the partition body. In addition, it is impossible to deform the pivotal tip side of the partition body itself. Therefore, it is possible to suitably exert a deterrent against an illegal act that attempts to cause the illegal jig to penetrate deep into the ball passage.

  Feature C6. The partition body is an opening / closing body that opens and closes the sound intake hole, and is capable of shifting to the partition state by performing an opening operation on the sound intake hole, and closing the sound intake hole. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C5, wherein the game machine can shift to the downflow permission state by performing an operation.

  In the configuration in which the sound intake hole is provided in the outer peripheral portion of the ball passage, there is a concern that game balls flowing down the ball passage may flow out of the ball passage through the sound intake hole depending on the size and shape of the sound intake hole. . On the other hand, according to the feature C6, the partition body can close the sound intake hole when in the flow permission state, so that the flow of the game ball in the ball passage is permitted while the sound capture hole is closed. It is possible to prevent the game ball from flowing out of the ball passage from the hole.

  In addition, when the partition is in the partition state, the sound intake hole is open, so that even if the illegal jig inserted into the ball passage reaches the partition, the illegal jig is still in the ball passage. While the partition body regulates the advance to the upstream side, the partition body can also guide the illegal jig to the sound intake hole. In this case, the illegal jig is guided from the sound intake hole to the outside of the ball passage, so that the illegal jig can be suppressed from entering deep into the ball passage.

  Feature C7. When the partition body is in the partition state, the sound capturing hole is opened by extending toward the spherical passage from the inner peripheral surface of the sound capturing hole or flush with the inner peripheral surface of the sound capturing hole. The gaming machine according to feature C6, wherein

  According to the feature C7, when the partition body is in the partition state, the partition body is not separated from the sound intake hole to the upstream side in the ball passage, so that the illegal jig temporarily inserted in the ball passage reaches the partition body. Even if it arrives, the illegal jig will be guided to the sound intake hole by advancing along the plate surface of the partition. In this case, the suspicious person who has inserted the illegal jig into the ball passage cannot grasp even the position of the ball passage upstream of the partition.

Feature C8. A driving unit (regulation driving unit 366) for performing a state transition of the partition body;
Control means (sub-MPU 432 of the notification / production control device 143) capable of shifting the partition body between the partition state and the downflow permission state by performing drive control of the drive unit;
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C7, comprising:

  According to the feature C8, it is possible to shift the partition body to the partition state or the downflow permission state at an arbitrary timing, for example, in accordance with the discharge state of the game ball from the ball passage to the ball tray. For this reason, there is a case where priority is given to preventing insertion of an illegal jig into the ball passage, a case where priority is given to increasing the efficiency of sound emission from the ball passage, and a case where game balls are discharged from the ball passage to the ball tray. Can be used properly as appropriate. As a result, it is possible to realize all of the enhancement of the sound emission efficiency from the ball passage, the suppression of the illegal payout of the game balls, and the proper discharge of the game balls to the ball tray.

Feature C9. The control means includes:
Means for determining whether or not the gaming state is in a special gaming state (opening / closing execution mode) advantageous to the player (a function of executing the processing of step S804);
Means for shifting the partition body to the downflow permission state when the gaming state is determined to be the special gaming state (a function of executing the processing of step S803);
The gaming machine according to C8, comprising:

  According to the feature C9, when the gaming state is the special gaming state, the partition body is kept in the flow permission state, so that a large number of gaming balls are continuously discharged from the ball passage to the ball tray as prize balls. Even so, the partition body is less likely to hinder the flow of the game balls. For this reason, many game balls can be properly paid out to the ball tray.

  If a large number of game balls continuously flow down the ball path, the game balls may hinder the insertion of the jig, or the player may benefit from the game balls. Therefore, it is assumed that the possibility that the jig is inserted into the ball passage is low. Therefore, if the game state is the special game state, even if the partition body is not in the partition state, the deterrent of the illegal jig from being inserted into the ball passage does not significantly decrease.

Feature C10. The control means includes:
Means for determining whether or not the ball tray is full of game balls (a function of executing the processing of step S802);
Means for shifting the partition body to the downflow permission state when it is determined that the ball tray is full (a function of executing the processing of step S803);
The gaming machine according to feature C8 or C9, comprising:

  According to the feature C10, when the ball tray is full, the partition body is kept in the downflow permission state. Therefore, even if the game balls are stacked in the ball passage, the partition bodies are stacked with the game balls. It is hard to hinder climbing. For this reason, it is possible to suppress the partition body from being deformed or damaged as the game balls are stacked.

  If the ball tray is full, the improper recovery may occur due to the hindrance of the game ball to the insertion of the fraudulent jig, or the benefit of the game ball to the player. It is assumed that the tool is unlikely to be inserted into the ball passage. Therefore, if the ball tray is full, even if the partitioning body is not in the partitioning state, the deterrent to the illegal jig from being inserted into the ball passage will not be significantly reduced.

Feature C11. Ball detection means (full detection sensor 280) for detecting that game balls are stacked in the ball passage is provided downstream of the sound intake hole in the ball passage,
The game according to Feature C10, wherein the control means determines that the ball tray is full when the ball detection means detects an accumulation of game balls in the ball passage. Machine.

  According to the feature C11, when the ball tray is full, it is possible to shift the partition body to the downflow permission state before the game balls stacked in the ball passage reach the sound intake hole. This makes it possible to more reliably suppress the partition body from being deformed or damaged as the game balls are stacked.

<Feature D group>
The invention of the following feature D group is effective for the following problems.

  A gaming machine such as a pachinko machine is provided with a speaker capable of outputting a sound such as a sound effect (for example, see JP-A-2005-261808). In a gaming machine, sound output from a speaker is emitted toward the front of the gaming machine.

  However, there is still room for improvement in the configuration in which the sound output from the sound output means such as a speaker is emitted to the front of the gaming machine.

Feature D1. A ball tray (lower plate 34) provided in a state exposed to the front of the gaming machine and storing game balls,
A ball passage (front door side lower plate passage portion 273) for discharging game balls to the ball tray,
A speaker (lower speaker 30a) having a diaphragm (diaphragm 30b) and outputting sound in accordance with the vibration of the diaphragm;
A sound intake hole (lower plate passage hole 344) provided on an outer peripheral portion of the ball passage (the vertical portion 342b of the lower plate passage partitioning portion 342) to take sound output from the speaker into the ball passage;
A suppressing mechanism (a regulating member 363) for suppressing a game ball from flowing out of the ball passage through the sound intake hole;
A gaming machine comprising:

  According to the feature D1, since the speaker has a specific diaphragm, the speaker is disposed at a position separated from the ball passage unlike the configuration in which the outer peripheral portion of the ball passage is used as an external diaphragm. Becomes possible. Also in this case, since the sound take-in hole is provided in the outer peripheral portion of the ball passage, the output sound from the speaker can be taken into the ball passage through the sound take-in hole. In addition, since the regulation mechanism is provided for the sound intake hole, it is possible to restrict the game balls from flowing out of the ball passage through the sound intake hole.

  As described above, in a gaming machine in which sound is emitted from a ball passage, both output sound from a speaker can be suitably taken into the ball passage and game balls can be properly discharged from the ball passage to the ball tray. it can. That is, it is possible to provide a configuration suitable for emitting the sound output from the speaker to the front of the gaming machine.

  Feature D2. The gaming machine according to Feature D1, wherein the suppression mechanism is configured by arranging the sound intake hole at a position separated from a flow path of a game ball in the ball passage.

  According to the feature D2, since the sound capturing hole is separated from the downflow path of the game ball, it is possible to suppress the game ball from flowing out of the sound capturing hole to the outside. In addition, since the sound intake hole is separated from the flow path of the game ball, the sound intake hole is less likely to be blocked by the flowing game ball, so the output from the speaker even when the game ball is flowing down. Sound will be properly taken into the ball passage through the sound taking hole. Therefore, it is possible to realize a configuration in which both the game ball and the sound are released from the ball passage to the ball tray.

Feature D3. The ball passage has a vertical passage portion (vertical passage portion 285) extending vertically.
The feature D1 or D2 is characterized in that the suppression mechanism is configured such that the sound intake hole is provided in a side surface portion of the vertical passage portion (the vertical portion 342b of the lower plate passage partition portion 342). The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature D3, the sound capturing hole can be arranged at a position in the ball passage that does not overlap with the downflow path of the game ball. For this reason, even if the sound intake hole is sized and shaped to allow a game ball to pass through, it is possible to prevent the game ball from flowing out of the ball passage through the sound intake hole.

Feature D4. The ball passage has a horizontal passage portion (upper horizontal passage portion 284, lower horizontal passage portion 286) extending laterally from an upstream end of the vertical passage portion,
The sound intake hole is a lower side surface portion (lower plate passage partition) extending downward from the floor portion (lateral portion 342a of the lower plate passage partition portion 342) of the horizontal passage portion as the side surface portion of the vertical passage portion. The gaming machine according to Feature D3, wherein the gaming machine is provided in a vertical portion 342b) of the portion 342.

  According to the feature D4, since the sound take-in hole is arranged at a position on the side of the corner portion between the vertical passage portion and the horizontal passage portion on the side surface portion of the vertical passage portion, the game ball that has passed through the horizontal passage portion Will flow down the vertical passage while moving away from the sound intake hole. In this case, since it is difficult for the game balls to flow down toward the sound intake hole, it is possible to suppress the game balls flowing down the vertical passage from flowing out of the ball passage from the sound intake hole.

  Feature D5. The gaming machine according to Feature D4, wherein the sound intake hole extends downward from the floor at the lower side surface.

  According to the feature D5, since the sound intake hole can be arranged directly below the horizontal passage portion in the vertical passage portion, it is more sure that the game sphere flowing down from the horizontal passage portion toward the vertical passage portion contacts the sound intake hole. Can be suppressed. Therefore, even if the sound intake hole is formed in the vertical passage portion, it is possible to realize a configuration in which the game ball is properly discharged to the ball tray regardless of the sound intake hole.

  Feature D6. The suppression mechanism is characterized in that it has an outflow restriction portion (restriction member 363) that is provided for the sound intake hole to regulate the outflow of game balls from the sound intake hole. The gaming machine according to any one of D1 to D5.

  According to the feature D6, since the outflow regulation portion is provided for the sound intake hole, even if the game ball advances toward the sound intake hole, the game ball can be bounced back by the outflow regulation portion. In this case, the outflow of the game ball from the sound intake hole is regulated by the outflow restricting section even if the sound intake hole does not have a size or a shape that does not allow the game ball to pass through, so that the efficiency of capturing the sound from the sound intake hole is excessive. The opening area of the sound intake hole can be set to be large enough to prevent the sound intake hole from dropping. Thereby, it can be suppressed that the volume of the sound emitted from the ball passage is insufficient.

  Feature D7. The outflow restricting unit is capable of shifting to a non-regulated state in which the outflow of game balls from the sound intake hole is not restricted and a regulated state in which the outflow of game balls from the sound intake hole is restricted. The gaming machine according to Feature D6.

  When the outflow of the game ball from the sound intake hole is regulated by the outflow regulation unit, there is a concern that the uptake of sound from the sound intake hole into the ball passage is also regulated by the outflow regulation unit. In this case, even if the output sound from the speaker is taken into the ball passage from the sound take-in hole, the sound quality of the sound emitted from the ball passage tends to deteriorate.

  On the other hand, according to the feature D7, when the outflow regulation unit is in the non-regulation state, the sound emission from the ball passage is interrupted, and the sound quality of the emitted sound is prevented from deteriorating even if it is not interrupted. it can. On the other hand, when the outflow restricting unit is in the restricted state, it is possible to suppress the outflow of the game ball from the sound intake hole. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately perform both emission of the sound from the ball passage and ejection of the game ball.

  Feature D8. The gaming machine according to Feature D7, wherein the outflow restriction section shifts from the non-restricted state to the restricted state by being pressed by a game ball flowing down the ball passage.

  According to the feature D8, when the game ball is not approaching the sound intake hole, the outflow regulating portion is in the non-regulated state, so that sound can be properly emitted from the ball passage. On the other hand, when the flowing game ball approaches the sound intake hole, the outflow regulating portion shifts to the regulated state by being pressed by the game ball, thereby suppressing the outflow of the game ball from the sound intake hole. it can. Therefore, both sound emission from the ball passage and discharge of the game ball can be appropriately performed in accordance with the situation where the game ball is flowing down the ball passage.

  Feature D9. The gaming machine according to Feature D8, wherein the outflow restriction unit returns from the restricted state to the non-restricted state when the game ball passes and the pressing is released.

  According to the feature D9, when the game ball passes around the sound intake hole in the ball passage, the outflow regulating portion is in the regulation state only for an extremely short period, so that the sound emission from the ball passage is interrupted or the sound quality of the sound is reduced. Can be extremely shortened. Therefore, even if the outflow of the game ball from the sound intake hole is regulated, it is possible to suppress the effect of the sound emitted from the ball passage from being significantly reduced.

  In addition, as a configuration in which the outflow regulating portion returns from the regulated state to the unregulated state, the outflow regulating portion is elastically deformed in accordance with the transition from the unregulated state to the regulated state, and is caused by the elastic deformation A configuration including an urging member that returns the outflow regulating portion from the regulated state to the unregulated state by an urging force, or a configuration in which the outflow regulating portion returns from the regulated state to the unregulated state by the weight of the outflow regulating portion. Is mentioned.

  Feature D10. The outflow restricting section is configured to transition between the non-restricted state and the restricted state by rotating about an upstream end portion of the outflow restricting section as a rotation axis. A gaming machine according to any one of the preceding claims.

  According to the feature D10, a configuration in which the outflow restriction portion shifts from the non-restriction state to the restriction state by being pressed by the game ball flowing down the ball passage can be realized by simply providing the outflow restriction portion in a rotatable manner. .

Feature D11. A driving unit (regulation driving unit 366) for performing a state transition of the outflow restriction unit;
Control means (sub-MPU 432 of the notification and effect control device 143) capable of shifting the outflow regulating section between the non-regulated state and the regulated state by performing drive control of the driving section;
The gaming machine according to any one of features D7 to D10, comprising:

  When game balls are piled up in the ball passage due to the ball tray being full, etc., the stacked game balls become an obstacle, and the outflow control section cannot shift from the unregulated state to the regulated state, and There is a concern that the outflow of the game ball from the intake hole cannot be regulated by the outflow regulation unit.

  On the other hand, according to the feature D11, the outflow restriction unit can be shifted to the restricted state or the non-restricted state at an arbitrary timing, for example, in accordance with the flowing state of the game ball in the ball passage, If the possibility that the game ball will flow out of the sound intake hole is likely to increase, such as when the ball tray is full, the outflow restricting section can be shifted to the non-restricted state in advance. Thereby, it can be suppressed that the game ball is not properly discharged from the ball passage to the ball tray due to the presence of the sound intake hole.

Feature D12. The control means includes:
Means for determining whether or not the ball tray is full of game balls (a function of executing the processing of step S802);
Means for shifting the outflow control section to the control state when it is determined that the ball tray is full (a function of executing the processing of step S803);
The gaming machine according to Feature D11, comprising:

  According to the feature D12, when the ball tray is full, the outflow restricting portion is kept in the restricting state. Therefore, even if the game balls stacked in the ball passage reach the sound intake hole, the game is not stopped. The outflow restricting section can restrict the ball from flowing out of the sound intake hole.

Feature D13. Ball detection means (full detection sensor 280) for detecting that game balls are stacked in the ball passage is provided downstream of the sound intake hole in the ball passage,
The control means is configured to determine that the ball tray is full when the ball detection means detects the accumulation of game balls in the ball passage, wherein the ball tray is full. D11 or D12. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature D13, when the ball tray is full, it is possible to shift the outflow regulating portion to the regulating state before the game balls stacked in the ball passage reach the sound intake hole. In this case, since it is possible to avoid a situation in which the stacked game balls hinder the outflow control unit from shifting to the control state, it is possible to more reliably control the game balls from flowing out of the sound intake holes.

  Feature D14. The outflow restricting unit restricts outflow of a game ball from the sound intake hole by dividing the sound intake hole into a plurality of holes, and is characterized in that the outflow restriction unit divides the sound intake hole into a plurality of holes. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature D14, since the sound can be passed through the sound intake hole even in a state where the sound is divided into a plurality of parts by the outflow restriction part, the outflow restriction part restricts the outflow of the game ball from the sound intake hole. And simultaneously taking the output sound from the loudspeaker into the ball passage from the sound taking hole can be realized at the same time. Thereby, even if the outflow regulating portion is not constituted by a movable member, both the proper discharge of the game ball from the ball passage to the ball tray and the proper emission of the output sound from the speaker from the ball passage. Becomes possible.

  Feature D15. The features D1 to D14 are characterized in that the suppression mechanism is configured such that the sound intake hole is provided in a ceiling portion of the ball passage (a vertical passage portion 452b of the lower plate passage partition portion 452). A gaming machine according to any one of the preceding claims.

  According to the feature D15, the sound take-in hole can be arranged at a position in the ball passage that is separated upward from the flow-down path of the game ball. For this reason, even if the sound intake hole is sized and shaped to allow a game ball to pass through, it is possible to prevent the game ball from flowing out of the ball passage through the sound intake hole.

  Feature D16. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D15, wherein the suppression mechanism is configured by providing a plurality of the sound intake holes as small holes that do not allow a game ball to pass.

  According to the feature D16, since the game ball cannot pass through the small sound intake hole, the outflow of the game ball from the ball passage can be suppressed. In addition, since the output sound from the rear side of the speaker passes through the plurality of small holes, the mid-high range of the sound is easily attenuated, so that the low range of the sound emitted from the ball passage is clearly heard. You can do so. For this reason, it is possible to enhance the effect of the bass sound by using a configuration for preventing the game balls from flowing out of the ball passage.

Feature D17. The ball passage includes a horizontal passage portion (upper horizontal passage portion 284) extending in the width direction or the depth direction of the gaming machine, and a vertical passage portion (vertical passage portion 285) connected to the horizontal passage portion and extending vertically. Have
The suppression mechanism is characterized in that a plurality of the sound intake holes are provided on each of the outer peripheral portions of the horizontal passage portion and the vertical passage portion as small holes that do not allow a game ball to pass therethrough, The gaming machine according to any one of the features D1 to D16.

  According to the feature D17, since the game ball cannot pass through the small sound intake hole, the outflow of the game ball from the ball passage can be suppressed. In addition, since the output sound from the rear side of the speaker passes through the plurality of small holes, the mid-high range of the sound is easily attenuated, so that the low range of the sound emitted from the ball passage is clearly heard. You can do so. For this reason, it is possible to enhance the effect of the bass sound by using a configuration for preventing the game balls from flowing out of the ball passage.

  Furthermore, since the direction of sound transmission from the air chamber is different between the horizontal passage portion and the vertical passage portion, it is possible to create an environment in which the low range of the sound is easily amplified and the middle and high range is easily attenuated. This makes it possible to further enhance the effect of the bass sound.

  Hereinafter, a basic configuration of a gaming machine to which the above features can be applied will be described.

  Pachinko gaming machine: operation means (game ball launch handle 41) operated by the player, game ball launch means (game ball launch mechanism 110) for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operation means, and the fired ball A ball passage (guide rail 100) for guiding a game ball to a predetermined game area (game area PE), and each game component disposed in the game area, are provided with a predetermined passage portion (general prize) among the game components. A gaming machine that gives a privilege to a player when a game ball passes through the mouth 61 or the like.

  Spinning-type gaming machines such as slot machines: equipped with variable display means for variably displaying a symbol row composed of a plurality of symbols and then finally displaying the symbol row, and starting to change the symbol due to the operation of the starting operation means The variation of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the stopping operation means or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and a special game advantageous to the player on condition that the final stopped symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol is required. A gaming machine that generates a state (such as a bonus game).

  Ball-based belt-type gaming machine: equipped with variable display means for displaying a symbol row composed of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then displaying the symbol row as a final stop. The fluctuation of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for the game or after a lapse of a predetermined time, and a special game state (bonus) which is advantageous to the player on condition that the final stop symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol is required. And a payout device for paying out game balls to the ball tray, and a payout device for providing a ball tray and taking in game balls from the ball tray. A gaming machine configured such that the operation of the starting operation means is enabled when a game ball is thrown in the game machine.

  Reference numeral 10: a pachinko machine as a gaming machine; 13, an inner frame as a gaming machine body; 14, a front door frame as a gaming machine front body; 30a, a lower speaker as a speaker; 30b, a diaphragm; Lower plate, 34a: first ball entrance constituting a ball passage, 45: front door side passage unit, 60a: game board, 75: symbol display device as a picture display device, 100: guide rail, 110: game ball launch A game ball launching mechanism as a means, 118 a foul ball passage as a collection passage, 143 a notification / effect control device having control means, 170 a display control device as display control means, 231 a base body Base frame, 259: Lower pack side lower plate passage portion forming a ball passage and a second passage portion, 263 ... Inner frame side lower plate passage portion forming a ball passage and a second passage portion, 273 ... A ball passage is formed Front plate side lower plate passage portion as a surface passage portion and a first passage portion, 279... An outside opening portion as an entrance portion, 280... A full detection sensor as a ball detecting means, 281a. Upper horizontal passage portion as a passage portion, 285 vertical passage portion as a passage portion, 286 lower horizontal passage portion as a passage portion and a horizontal passage portion, 289 ball receiving passageway, 304 an intermediate bending portion as a ball corner portion Reference numeral 305 denotes a downstream bent portion as a spherical corner portion; 331 denotes an enclosure; 332 denotes an air chamber; 336 denotes a speaker opening; 342 denotes a lower plate passage partition portion having a side surface portion of a vertical passage portion and a floor portion of a horizontal passage portion. , 342a: a horizontal portion as a floor portion of the horizontal passage portion and an outer peripheral portion of the ball passage; 342b, a vertical portion as a side portion of the vertical passage portion; A curved part as a part, 363 a flow-out restricting part constituting a suppressing mechanism, a restricting member as an opening / closing body and a partition, 365 a rotational stopper, 366 a restricting driving part as a driving part, 371 a horn part A sub-MPU 432 of the notification and presentation control device as control means, 452 a lower plate passage partitioning portion having a ceiling of a ball passage, 452b a vertical passage portion forming a ceiling of a ball passage, 461 ... A partition member as a partition body.

Claims (2)

A gaming machine body having a gaming board;
A gaming machine front body rotatably provided in front of the gaming machine with respect to the gaming machine body,
A ball tray provided on the front of the gaming machine and capable of storing gaming balls,
A ball passage for discharging game balls to the ball tray,
A speaker having a diaphragm, and outputting a sound in accordance with the vibration of the diaphragm,
Emission means capable of emitting the sound output from the speaker to the front of the gaming machine,
With
On the outer peripheral portion of the ball passage, there is provided a passage portion that allows the sound in the emission means to pass through the ball passage,
The ball passage,
Sound emitted from the passage portion into the ball passage can be emitted toward the ball tray,
The game machine has a front passage portion provided on the front body and communicating with the ball tray,
The gaming machine front body constitutes at least a part of the front passage section and the discharging means,
The passage unit, the gaming machine characterized that you have provided at different locations in the bottom of the ball passage at the outer periphery of the ball passage. The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising a launching means capable of launching a game ball.

Images